Carrier 30GX125, 30GX080, 30GX115, 30GX150, 30GX136 Controls, Start-up, Operation, Service, And Troubleshooting

...
Page 1
ECOLOGIC™ Air-Cooled and Fluid Cooled Chillers
Controls Start-Up, Operation,
Service, and Troubleshooting
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Installing, starting up, and servicing this equipment can be hazardous due to system pressures, electrical components, and equipment location (roof, elevated structures, etc.). Only trained, qualified installers and service mechanics should in­stall, start up, and service this equipment.
When working on this equipment, observe precautions in the literature, and on tags, stickers, and labels attached to the equipment, and any other safety precautions that apply. Follow all safety codes. W ear safety glasses and work gloves. Use care in handling, rigging, and setting this equipment, and in han­dling all electrical components.
Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off all power to this equipment during installation and ser­vice. There may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore power until work is completed.
This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out com­ponents, or to bypass or otherwise depart from recom­mended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control board or accompanying wiring may destroy the electronic modules or electrical components.
To prevent potential damage to heat exchanger tubes always run fluid through heat exchangers when adding or removing refrigerant charge. Use appropriate brine solu­tions in cooler and condenser fluid loops to prevent the freezing of heat exchangers when the equipment is exposed to temperatures below 32 F (0° C).
DO NOT VENT refrigerant relief valves within a build­ing. Outlet from relief valves must be vented outdoors in accordance with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE (American National Standards Institute/Ame rican Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers) 15 (Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration). The accu­mulation of refrigerant in an enclosed space can displace oxygen and cause asphyxiation. Provide adequate ventila­tion in enclosed or low overhead areas. Inhalation of high concentrations of vapor is harmful and may cause heart ir­regularities, unconsciousness or death. Misuse can be fatal. Vapor is heavier than air and reduces the amount of oxygen available for breathing. Product causes eye and skin irrita­tion. Decomposition products are hazardous.
30GX080-350
30HXA,HXC076-271
50/60 Hz
Series 3
DO NOT attempt to unbraze factory joints when servicing this equipment. Compressor oil is flammable and there is no way to detect how much oil may be in any of the refrig­erant lines. Cut lines with a tubing cutter as required when performing service. Use a pan to catch any oil that may come out of the lines and as a gage for how much oil to add to system. DO NOT re-use compressor oil.
CONTENTS
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS GENERAL MAJOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS Processor Module (PSIO-1) DSIO-HV Relay Module Electronic Expansion Device Module Compressor Protection Module (CPM) PSIO-2 (8052) Module Keypad and Display Module
(Also Called HSIO-II) Control (LOR) Switch OPERATION D ATA Electronic Expansion Device (EXD)
• EXV OPERATION
• ECONOMIZER OPERATION
Oil Pumps Motor Cooling Back Pressure Valve (30GX and 30HXA only) Sensors Compressor Protection Module (CPM)
• OUTPUTS
• INPUTS
Wye-Delta vs Across-the-Line (XL)
Starting Option Capacity Control
• MINUTES LEFT FOR START
• MINUTES OFF TIME
• LOADING SEQUENCE
• CLOSE CONTROL
• LEAD/LAG DETERMINATION
• CAPACITY SEQUENCE DETERMINATION
• MINIMUM LOAD VALVE
• CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES
Head Pressure Control
• GENERAL
• AIR-COOLED UNITS (30GX)
• WATER-COOLED UNITS (30HXC)
• CONDENSERLESS UNITS (30HXA)
• 09DK CONDENSING UNITS
• ADJUSTING PID ROUTINES
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2,3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . 4
. . . . . . . . . . . 4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Page
Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.
Book 2 Ta b 5 c
PC 903 Catalog No. 533-095 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30G,H-5T Pg 1 8-99 Replaces: 30G,H-4T
Page 2
CONTENTS (cont)
Page
Cooler and Condenser (30HXC) Pump Control
• COOLER PUMP CONTROL
• CONDENSER PUMP CONTROL
Cooler Heater Control Oil Heater Control Keypad and Display Module
(Also Called HSIO-II)
• ACCESSING FUNCTIONS
AND SUBFUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
• AUTOMATIC DEFAULT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
• STATUS FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
• TEST FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
• HISTORY FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
• SET POINT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
• SERVICE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
• SCHEDULE FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Temperature Reset
• EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE RESET
• EXTERNALLY POWERED RESET
• RETURN FLUID TEMPERATURE RESET
Demand Limit
• DEMAND LIMIT (Switch Controlled, 30GX Only)
• EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT
• DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled)
TROUBLESHOOTING Checking Display Codes Unit Shutoff Complete Unit Stoppage Single Circuit Stoppage Restart Procedure
• POWER FAILURE EXTERNAL TO THE UNIT
Alarms and Alerts Compressor Alarm/Alert Circuit EXD Troubleshooting Procedure
• INSPECTING/OPENING ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVES
• INSPECTING/OPENING ECONOMIZERS
SERVICE Servicing Coolers and Condensers
• TUBE PLUGGING
• RETUBING
• TIGHTENING COOLER/CONDENSER HEAD BOLTS
Inspecting/Cleaning Heat Exchangers
•COOLERS
• CONDENSERS (30HX Only)
Water Treatment Condenser Coils (30GX Only)
• COIL CLEANING
Condenser Fans (30GX Only) Refrigerant Charging/Adding Charge Oil Charging/Low Oil Recharging Oil Filter Maintenance
• REPLACING THE EXTERNAL OIL FILTER
• REPLACING THE INTERNAL OIL FILTER
Compressor Changeout Sequence
• BURNOUT CLEAN-UP PROCEDURE
Moisture-Liquid Indicator Filter Drier Liquid Line Service Valve Thermistors
•LOCATION
• THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT
Pressure Transducers
• PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION
• TROUBLESHOOTING
Safety Devices
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-54
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-68
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
. . . . . . . . . . . 55
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
. . . . . . . . . . . . 56
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
• COMPRESSOR PROTECTION
• OIL SEPARATOR HEATERS (30GX)
• COOLER PROTECTION
Relief Devices
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
• PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
Control Modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
• PROCESSOR MODULE (PSIO-1), COMPRESSOR PROTECTION MODULE (CPM), HIGH VOLTAGE RELAY MODULE (DSIO-HV), AND EXV DRIVER MODULE (DSIO-EXV), 12/6 MODULE (PSIO-2)
• RED LED
• GREEN LED
• CONTROL MODULE BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) Interface
. . . . . . . . 66
• PROCESSOR MODULE (PSIO-1)
• HIGH VOLTAGE RELAY MODULE (DSIO-HV)
Replacing Defective Processor Module Winter Shutdown Preparation PRE-START-UP PROCEDURE System Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
START-UP AND OPERATION Actual Start-up Operating Sequence FIELD WIRING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-75
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
. . . . . . . . . . 68
APPENDIX A
(Compressor Must Trip Amps)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 76-80
APPENDIX B
(Capacity Loading Sequence) APPENDIX C (Available Accessories) APPENDIX D (Building Interface)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81-85
. . . . . . . . . 86,87
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 88-92
APPENDIX E (Cooler and
Condenser Pressure Drop)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93-96
APPENDIX F
(Typical System Components) INDEX START-UP CHECKLIST
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CL-1 to CL-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,98
GENERAL
IMPORTANT: The 30GX,HX units use refrigerant R-134a. Compressor oil used with R-134a is Polyolester oil.
This publication contains Start-Up, Service, Controls, Oper­ation and Troubleshooting data for the 30GX080-350 and 30HXA,C076-271 screw chillers.
Circuits are identified as circuits A and B, and compressors are identified as A1 or A2 in circuit A, and B1 or B2 in circuit B.
The 30GX,HX Series chillers feature microprocessor-based electronic controls and electronic expansion devices (EXD) in each refrigeration circuit.
The control system cycles compressor loaders and/or com­pressors to mai ntain the se lected lea ving fluid te mperature s et point. The system automatically positions the EXD to maintain the specified refrigerant level in the cooler. The system also has capabilities to control a condenser water valve to maintain suit­able leaving-water temperature for the 30HXC unit. Safeties are continuously monitored to prevent the unit from operating under unsafe conditions. A scheduling function can be pro­grammed by the user to control the unit’s occupied and unoc­cupied schedules. The control also operates a test function and a manual control function that allows the operator to check out­put signals and ensure components are operable.
The control system consists of a processor module (PSIO-1), an EXD driver module (DSIO-EXV), a high voltage relay module on 30GX units (DSIO-HV), 2 six-pack relay boards, a keypad and display module (also called HSIO-II), 2 electronic expansion devices (EXDs), 1 compressor protec­tion module (CPM) per pair of compressors, a PSIO-2 module,
2
Page 3
6 thermistors, and up to 10 transducers. A remote enhanced display is available as an accessory.
MAJOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Processor Module (PSIO-1) —
upgrade to the original PSIO (8088) module, with superior electrical noise immunity capability. It contains the operating software and controls the operation of the machine. It has 12 input channels and 6 output channels.
The PSIO-1 continuously monitors input/output channel in­formation received from all the modules and controls all output signals for all output channels. It also controls the relays on the six-pack relay board. The processor module also controls the EXD driver module, commanding it to open or close each EXD in order to maintain the proper cooler level. Information is transmitted between the processor module, CPM modules, the EXD driver module, and the HSIO-II standard display module through a 3-wire communications bus called COMM3. The remote enhanced display (accessory) is connected to the PSIO-1 module through a 3-wire communications bus, but uses a different communication bus called COMM1. The COMM1 bus is also used to communicate to other CCN (Carrier Comfort Network) devices when the unit is installed in a network application.
DSIO-HV Relay Module —
4 inputs and 8 outputs and is installed on 30GX units only. The module communicates the status of the inputs with the PSIO-1 module and operates the oil heater, outdoor fan, and minimum load control outputs.
Electronic Expansion Device Module —
electronic expansion device module has 4 inputs and 2 outputs. It receives signals from the PSIO-1 module and operates the electronic expansion devices. The electronic expansion device module also sends the PSIO-1 module the status of its 4 input channels.
Compressor Protection Module (CPM) —
compressor protection module monitors the high pressure switch status, running current, and motor temperature for each compressor. Each CPM controls up to 2 compressors. The CPM also controls the motor cooling solenoid, oil solenoid, and contactor outputs. A pre-punched configuration header for each compressor determines the must trip amps setting. Each CPM sends the PSIO-1 each compressor’s motor temperature, relay status, and running current as a percentage of the must trip amps value. The CPM als o communic ates any al arm con­ditions as the feedback value.
PSIO-2 (8052) Module —
put/output module only, as there is no unit software loaded in the module. This module has 12 input channels and 6 output channels.
This module is an
The DSIO-HV module has
The
The
This module is used as an in-
Keypad and Display Module (Also Called HSIO-II) —
keys, 4 operative keys, 12 numeric keys, and a 2-line 24-character alphanumeric LCD (liquid crystal display). Key usage is explained in the Accessing Functions and Subfunc­tions section on page 15.
Control (LOR) Switch —
fined by the position of the LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE (LOR) switch. This is a 3-positi on manual swit ch th at allow s th e chill­er to be put under the control of its own controls (LOCAL ), manually stopped (OFF), or controlled through a set of remote contacts (REMOTE). This switch i s different than the switch
This device consists of a keypad with 8 function
Control of the chiller is de-
that is used in the Flotronic™ II controls configuration. The CCN control is enabled through the H SIO-II. The switch al­lows unit operation as shown in T able 1.
In the LOCAL position, the c hiller i s allowed to ope rate and respond to the scheduling configuration, CCN configuration, and set point data. In the remote position, the unit operates sim­ilarly to the LOCAL position, except the remote contacts must be closed for the unit to operate.
Table 1 — Unit Mode from LOR Switch
and CCN State
SWITCH
POSITION
LOCAL
OFF
REMOTE
CCN — NR —
NOTE: If the unit is configured for a clock, then the unit is under clock control if it is in an ON mode.
REMOTE
CONTACTS
NR
NR NR NR LOCAL OFF
OPEN NR NR LOCAL OFF
CLOSED
LEGEND Carrier Comfort Network
Input Not Read by Processor
CCN
CONFIGURATION
DISABLE NR LOCAL ON
ENABLE
DISABLE NR LOCAL ON
ENABLE
CCN
STATE
RUN CCN ON
STOP CCN OFF
RUN CCN ON
STOP CCN OFF
UNIT
MODE
OPERATION DATA
Electronic Expansion Devi ce (EXD) —
processor controls the EXD through the EXD driver module . The EXD will either be an EXV (electronic expansion valve) or an economizer. Inside both these devices is a linear actuator step­per motor.
EXV OPERATION — High-pressure liquid refrigerant en­ters the valve through the bottom. A series of calibrated slots are located inside t he orifice assembly. As refrigerant passes through the orifice, the pressure drops and the refrigerant changes to a 2-phase condition (liquid and vapor). To control refrigerant flow for different operating conditions, the sleeve moves up and down over the orifice, thereby changing orifice size. The sleeve is moved by a linear stepper motor. The step­per motor moves in increments and is controlled directly by the processor module. As the stepper motor rotates, motion is transferred into linear movement by the lead screw. Through the stepper motor and lead screw, 1500 discrete steps of motion are obtained. The large number of steps and long stroke result in very accurate control of refrigerant flow.
Each circuit has a liquid level sensor mounted vertically in the top of the cooler shell. The level sensor consists of a small electric resistance heater and 3 thermi stors wire d in s eries , po­sitioned at different heights inside the body of the well. The heater is designed so that the thermistors read approximately 200 F (93.3 C) in dry air . As the refrigerant level ris es (falls) in the cooler, the resistance of the closes t thermistor(s) will in­crease (decrease) as it is cooled by the rising liquid refrigerant (heated by the heater). This large resistance difference allows the control to accurate ly maint ain a spe cified le vel.
The level sensor monitors the refrigerant liquid level in the cooler and sends this infor mation to the PSIO-1. At initia l start­up, the EXV position is at zero. After that, the microprocessor keeps accurate track of the valve position in order to use this in­formation as input for the other control functions. The proces­sor does this by initializing the EXVs at start-up. The processor sends out enough closing pulses to the valve to move it from fully open to fully closed, then resets the position counter to ze­ro. From this point on, until the next initialization, the proces­sor counts the total number of open and closed steps it has sent to each valve.
The micro-
3
Page 4
ECONOMIZER OPERATION — Economizers are factory installed on 30GX105-350 units and 30HXA,C161-271 units. All other sizes use standard EXVs. The economizer improves both the chiller capacity and efficiency as well as providing compressor motor cooling. Inside the economizer are both a linear stepper motor (same as standard EXV motor) and a float valve. The stepper motor is controlled by the processor to maintain the desired liquid level in the cooler (as is done for chillers without economizers). The float valve maintains a liq­uid level in the bottom of the economizer.
Liquid refrigerant is supplied from the condenser through the end to the bottom of the economizer. A bubbler tube sup­plies a small amount of discharge gas to ensure that the float will be able to work properly. As the refrigerant passes through the EXD, its pr essure is reduced to an inter mediate level of about 75 psig (517 kPag). This pressure is maintained inside the economizer shell. Next, the refrigerant flows through the float valve where its pressure is further reduced to slightly above the pressure in the cooler.
The increase in performance is achieved when some of the refrigerant passing through the EXD flashes to vapor, further subcooling the liquid that is maintained at the bottom of the economizer. This increase in subcooling provides additional capacity. Also, since the additional power required to accom­plish this is minimal, the efficiency of the m achine improves. The vapor that flashes rises to the top of the economizer where it passes to the compressor and is used to provide motor cool­ing. After passing over the motor windings, the refrigerant reenters the cycle at an intermediate port i n the compression cycle.
Oil Pumps —
nally mounted prelubricating oil pump per circuit. This pump is operated as part of the start-up sequence. On 30GX units, the pumps are mounted to the base rails on the oil separator side of the unit. The pumps are mounted to a bracket on the condens­ers of 30HXC units and to the oil separator on 30HXA units.
When a circuit is required to start, the controls energize the oil pump first and read the oil pressure transducer reading. The pump is operated for a period of 20 seconds, after which the oil solenoid is energized to open the oil inlet valve at the compres­sor. The control again reads the pressure from the oil pressure transducer. If the pump has built up sufficient oil pressure, the compressor is allowed to start.
Once the compressor has started, the oil pump is turned off within 10 seconds. If the pump is not able to build up enough oil pressure, the pump is turned off. Within 3 seconds, the pump is re-energized and makes one additio nal attempt to build oil pressure. The control generates an alarm if the second at­tempt fails.
The oil pump is also used to supplement system pressure under certain operating conditions. The oil flow requirements of the compressor vary based on pressure differential across the compressor. The oi l pump is designed to provi de differential oil pressure during low pressure differential conditions. It is not designed to overcome high pressure drop across filters during high pressure differential conditions.
If the differential oil pressure (oil pressure – economizer pressure) for a compressor is less than 13 psi then the oil pump will be started. Just before the oil pump is started the control measures the pressure differential between the discharge pres­sure and oil pressure (oil system pressure drop). The oil system pressure drop is saved and used to determine when the oil pump should be shut off.
When the oil pump is operating, it is capable of increasing oil pressure from 0 psi to 50 psi depending on the oil flow
The 30GX,HX screw chillers use one exter-
requirements of the compressor. For example, if the compres­sor needs 2 gpm (high pressure differential condition) and the oil pump is capable of 1.2 gpm, there is no pressure rise and the oil flow will bypass the check valve and supply the 2 gpm to the compressor. If the compressor requires .75 gpm, the oil pump will increase pressure to satisfy the oil pressure require­ment.
The pump will continue to operate until the discharge pres­sure minus economizer pressure is greater then 17 psi plus the oil system pressure drop.
Example:
Discharge pressure 80 psi
Oil pressure 65 psi
Oil system pressure drop80 –65 = 15 psi
Economizer pressure 55 psi
Suction pressure 42 psi
Based on the above conditions the oil pump will be started because differential oil pressure equals 10 psi.
The oil pump will continue to operate until the discharge pressure minus economizer pressure (which equals 25) is greater than 17 plus 15 (oil system loss before pump was start­ed). The only way this can be satisfied is if the discharge pres­sure increases or the compressor unloads at which point the oil pump will be shut off.
Motor Cooling —
tures are controlled to a set point of 200 F (93.3 C). The control accomplishes this by cycling the motor cooling solenoid valve to allow liquid refrigerant to flow across the motor windings as needed. On units equipped with economizers, flash gas leaves the top of the economizer and continually flows to the motor windings. All refrigerant used for motor cooling re-enters the rotors through a port located midway along the compression cycle and is compressed to discharge pressure.
Compressor motor winding tempera-
Back Pressure Valve (30GX and 30HXA only) —
30GX units and mounted on the oil separator shell of 30HXA units. The valve’s function is to ensure that there is sufficient system differential pressure to allow for oil to be driven back to the compressor. A small copper line (economizer pressure) is connected to the top of the valve, which contains an internal spring that closes a piston if the pressure in the oil separator is not at least 15 psig greater than the economizer pressure.
Sensors —
Flotronic™ II chiller control system) gathers information from sensors to control the operation of the chiller. The units use up to 10 standard pressure transducers, up to 8 standard ther­mistors (including 4 motor temperature thermistors), and 2 liq­uid level thermistors to monitor and control system operation. The sensors are listed in Table 2.
Compressor Protection Module (CPM) —
CPM controls up to 2 compressors. The CPM provides the fol­lowing functions:
• compressor main contactor control|
• Wye-Delta contactor transition
• compressor ground current protection
• motor temperature reading
• high-pressure protection
• reverse rotation protection
• current imbalance protection
• compressor oil solenoid control
• motor cooling solenoid contro l
• sensor bus communications
• starting and running overcurrent protection
This valve is located on the oil separator outlet on
The 30GX,HX control system (based on the
One
4
Page 5
The CPM has the following 4 output relays and 4 inputs:
OUTPUTS:
• compressor contactor
• compressor oil solenoid
• compressor motor cooling soleno id
• Wye-Delta transition relay INPUTS:
• motor temperature
• three-phase current
• high-pressure switch A diagram of the CPM board is (HN67LM101) shown in
Fig. 1. One CPM board is installed on 30GX080-176 and 30HXA,C076-186 units, and 2 CPM boards are installed on 30GX205-350 and 30HXA,C206-271 units. The address for
switches 3 and 4. For CPM1 (compressors A1 and B1), both DIP switches should be set to 0. For CPM2 (compressor A2, for 30GX205-265 and 30HXA,C206-271 units only and com­pressors A2 and B2 for 30GX281-350 only), both switches should be set to 1. See Table 3 for CPM board connections. The CPM has a reset button located between the DIP switch and the J10 connector. Pressing the reset button on the CPM will clear any current CPM alarms, but will not turn off any outputs from the CPM. Pressing the reset button on the CPM will NOT cause the board to go through initialization. Initial­ization period only occurs during power-up and lasts for ap­proximately 2 minutes. Each compressor’s MTA (must trip amps) setting is communicated to the PSIO-1 during the initial­ization period. Switches 1 and 2 should be set to 0. See Table 4 for DIP switch settings.
each CPM board is set using DIP (dual in-line package)
Table 2 — Thermistor and Transducer Locations
Sensor Description Location Connection Terminals T1 T2 Motor Temp A1 Motor Temp A2* Motor Temp B1 Motor Temp B2† T5 T6 LL-A (T3) LL-B (T4) T7 (optiona l)* * STP (optional)** T8 (optiona l)* * T9 (optiona l)* *
Sensor Description Location Connection Terminals DPT-A SPT-A EPT-A OPT-A1 OPT-A2* DPT-B SPT-B EPT-B OPT-B1 OPT-B2†
*30HX206-271 and 30GX205-265 only. †Sensors are available as accessories for field installation.
Cooler Leaving Fluid Temp Cooler Head Leaving Fluid Side PSIO-2, J7 pins 2,3 Cooler Entering Fluid Temp Cooler Head Entering Fluid Side PSIO-2, J7 pins 5,6 Motor Temperature A1 Compressor A1 Junction Box CPM1, plug J5 Motor Temperature A2 Compressor A2 Junction Box CPM2, plug J5 Motor Temperature B1 Compressor B1 Junction Box CPM1, plug J9 Motor Temperature B2 Compressor B2 Junction Box CPM1, plug J9 Discharge Gas Temp A Top of Oil Separator Circuit A PSIO-2, J7 pins 8,9 Discharge Gas Temp B Top of Oil Separator Circuit B PSIO-2, J7 pins 11,12 Liquid Level Circuit A Top of Cooler Circuit A PSIO-1, J7 pins 5,6 Liquid Level Circuit B Top of Cooler Circuit B PSIO-1, J7 pins 8,9 Outdoor Air Thermistor Outside Air Stream PSIO-2, J7 pins 20,21 Space Temperature Conditioned Space PSIO-2, J7 pins 23,24 Condenser Entering Water Thermistor Condenser Entering Fluid Line PSIO-2, J7 pins 14,15 Condenser Leaving Water Thermistor Condenser Leaving Fluid Line PSIO-2, J7 pins 17,18
Discharge Pressure Circuit A Top of Condenser Separator Circuit A PSIO-1, J7 pin 22 Suction Pressure Circuit A Top of Cooler Circuit A PSIO-1, J7 pin 19 Economizer Pressure Circuit A Economizer Line Entering Comp A PSIO-1, J7 pin 10 Oil Pressure Compressor A1 Compres sor A1 Oil Connection PS IO-1, J7 pin 25 Oil Pressure Compressor A2 Compres sor A2 Oil Connection PS IO-1, J7 pin 1 Discharge Pressure Circuit B Top of Oil Separator Circuit B PSIO-1, J7 pin 16 Suction Pressure Circuit B Top of Cooler Circuit B PSIO-1, J7 pin 31 Economizer Pressure Circuit B Economizer Line Entering Comp B PSIO-1, J7 pin 13 Oil Pressure Compressor B1 Compres sor B1 Oil Connection PS IO-1, J7 pin 28 Oil Pressure Compressor B2 Compres sor B1 Oil Connection PS IO-1, J7 pin 16
THERMISTORS
PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
Table 3 — Compressor Protection Module
(CPM) Plug Connections
CPM PLUG DESCRIPTION
J1
J2, J6 J3, J7 J4, J8
J5, J9
J10, J11
NOTE: Plugs J2-J5 are for compressors A1 (CPM1) or A2 (CPM2). Plugs J6-J9 are for compressor B1 (CPM1) or B2 (CPM2).
24-vac Power Input Compressor Contactor(s) High Pressure Switch, Oil and Motor Cooling
Solenoids Current Sensor Input Compressor Motor Temperature Input Communication Connections
30GX080-176 30HXA076-186 30HXC076-186
30GX205-350 30HXA206-271 30HXC206-271
5
Table 4 — CPM Address DIP Switch Settings:
UNIT
CPM1 CPM2
1234 1 2 3 4
0000————
0000 0 0 1 1
Page 6
To verify proper must trip amps header configuration, press
and use the up arrow key on the HSIO to locate the must trip amp values. Press the reset button on the control pan­el to update these values. See Appendix A. If the values do not match those in Appendix A, verify that the configuration head­ers have been properly punched out.
The CPM communicates on the COMM3 communic ation bus to the PSIO-1 module. Proper operation of the CPM board can be verified by observing the 2 LEDs (light-emitting diodes) located on the board. The red LED blinks at a rate of once ev­ery 1 to 2 seconds. This indicates that the module is powered and operating correctly. The green LED blinks when the mod­ule is satisfactorily communicating with the PSIO-1 module. The CPM communicates the status of its inputs and outputs, and reports 15 different alarm conditions to the PSIO-1. The alarms are listed in Table 5.
The CPM module has many features that are specifically designed to protect the compressor, including reverse rota­tion protection. Do not attempt to bypass or alter any of the factory wiring. Any compressor operation in the reverse direction will result in a compressor failure that will require compressor replacement.
The PSIO-1 will generate an alert when it receives an alarm input from the CPM. The alert will be generated in a y.xx for­mat, where “y” refers to the compre ssor and “xx” to the alarm value in Table 5 (decimal point removed). For example, the HSIO might display Alarm 1.75 for a contactor failure occur­ring on compressor A1. Similarly, the display would read 5.85 for a motor overtemperature condition on compressor B1. Alerts for compressors A2 and B2 (if present) would be gener­ated as “2.xx” and “6.xx,” respectively. Alarm codes 3 and 4 would not be used. Ending zeros are not displayed.
The high-pressure switch is wired in series with the relay coils of the 8 relays on the CPM. If this switch opens during operation, all relays on the CPM are deenergized and the com­pressor is stopped. The failure is reported to the PSIO-1 and the processor module locks off the compressor from restarting un­til the alarm is manually reset.
1
0
SW1
LEGEND
LED — MTA —
NOTES:
1. The red LED blinks continuously when the module is operating properly.
2. The green LED blinks continuously when communi­cating properly with PSIO-1.
3. On all plugs, pin 1 is identified by a “●.’’
1
0
SW2
Light-Emitting Diode Must Trip Amps
1
00
SW3 SW4
1
COMP 2 MTA HEADER
DIP SWITCH
RESET BUTTON
J1
J10
J11
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3 4
8
8
GREEN LED
12
3
RED LED
5
4
5
4
1
COMP 1 MTA HEADER
1
2
3
1
J7
J6
1
J9
J8
J4
J5
J2
J3
2 3
1 2
3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2
3
1 2 3
Fig. 1 — Compressor Protection Module (HN67LM101)
6
Page 7
Table 5 — Compressor Protection Module
Feedback Codes
High Pressure Switch Trip 1.0 No Motor Current 2.0 Current Imbalance Alarm 10% 2.5 Current Imbalance Warning 10% 2.7 Current Imbalance 25% 3.0 Single Phase Current Loss 3.5 High Motor Current 4.0 Ground Fault 5.0 Contactor Failure 7.5 Current Phase Reversal 8.0 Motor Overtemperature 8.5 Open Thermistor 9.0 Configuration Header Fault 9.5 Shorted Thermistor 10.0 No Error 0
ALARM CONDITION VALUE
Wye-Delta vs Across-the-Line (XL) Starting Option —
208/230-3-60 or 230-3-50 (5 or 8 at Position 12 in model num­ber) are supplied with factory installed Wye-Delta starters. All other voltage options can be ordered with either Wye-Delta or XL starting options. The XL starting method is the most cost effective and simply starts the compressor motor in a Delta configuration (the motors are designed for continuous opera­tion in this configuration) using a single contactor. See Fig. 2. This is the simplest starting method to use and is ideal where starting current does not require limiting.
Where current limitations exist, the Wye-Delta option may be used. See Fig. 3. This option uses a factory-installed starter assembly for each compressor, which consists of 3 contactors labelled 1M, 2M, and S. As the compressor is started, the CPM module energizes contactors 1M and S, which connects and energizes the motor windings in a Wye configuration. The starting current required will be approximately 60% less than that required for an XL start due to the higher impedance of the motor windings when W ye connected. The compressor will at­tain about 100% of its normal operating speed (approximately 3 to 5 seconds) before the CPM module deenergizes the S con­tactor and energizes the 2M contactor, switching the compres­sor windings to a Delta wiring configuration. The S and 2M contactors in the starter assembly are both mechanic ally and electrically interlocked so that they will not both be energized at the same time.
Do not alter the factory-installed power wiring from the control box terminal block to the compressor junction block.
Doing so will cause permanent damage t o the compress or and will require that the compressor be replaced.
Capacity Control —
pressors, loaders, and minimum load control valves to maintain the user-configured leaving chilled fluid temperature set point. Entering fluid temperature is used by the microprocessor to de­termine the temperature drop across the cooler and is used in determining the optimum time to add or subtract capacity stag­es. The chilled fluid temperature set point can be automatically reset by the return temperature reset or space and outdoor-air temperature reset features. It can also be reset from an ext ernal 4 to 20 mA signal (requires field-supplied 500-ohm, sistor), or from a network signal.
The capacity control algorithm runs every 30 seconds. The algorithm attempts to maint a in the Control Point at the desired set point. Each time it runs, the control reads the e ntering and leaving fluid temperatures. The control determines the rate at which conditions are changing and calculates 2 variables based
All 30GX,HX chillers operating at voltages of
The control system cycles com-
1
/2 watt re-
on these conditions. Next, a capacity ratio (Load/Unload Factor under ) is calculated using the 2 variables to deter­mine whether or not to make any changes to the current stages of capacity. This ratio value ranges from –100 to + 100%. If the next stage of capacity is a compressor, the control start s (stops) a compressor when the ratio reaches + 100% (–100%). If the next stage of capacity is a loader, the control energizes (deener­gizes) a loader when the ratio reaches + 60% (–60%). Loaders are allowed to cycle faster than com pressors, to minimize the number of starts and stops on each compressor. A delay of 90 seconds occurs after each capacity step change.
MINUTES LEFT FOR START — This value is displayed in the Status subfunction and represents the amount of time to elapse before the unit is started. This value can be zero without the machine running in many situations. This can include being unoccupied, LOR switch in the OFF position, CCN not allowing unit to start, Demand Limit in effect, no call for cool­ing due to no load, and alarm or alert conditions present. If the machine should be running and none of the above are true, a minimum off time may be in effect. The machine should start normally once the time limit has expired.
MINUTES OFF TIME ( ) — This user configurable time period is used by the control to determine how long unit operation is delayed after power is applied/restored to the unit. It is also used to delay compressor restarts after the unit has shut off its lowest stage of capacity. Typically, this time period is configured when multiple machines are located on a single site. For example, this gives the user the ability t o prevent all the units from restarting at once afte r a power fa ilure. A val ue of zero for this variable does not mean that the unit should be running.
LOADING SEQUENCE — The 30GX,HX compressor effi­ciency is greatest at full load. Therefore, the following sequence list applies to capacity control.
1. The next compressor is not started until all others are run­ning at 100%.
2. The second unloading stage is only used during initial capacity staging of the unit at start-up.
3. Whenever a compressor is started i n a c ircuit , th e loaders in the circuit are deenergized for 15 seconds before the com­pressor is started. The loaders are energized 90 seconds after the compressor is started.
CLOSE CONTROL ( ) — When configured for Close Control, the control is allowed to use any loading/capacity con­trol devices required to maintain better leaving fluid tempera­ture regulation. All stages of unloading are available. See Appendix B for an example.
LEAD/LAG DETERMINATION ( ) — This is a con­figurable choice and is factory set to be automatic. The value can be changed to Circuit A or Circuit B leading, as desired. Set at automatic, the control will sum the current number of logged circuit starts and one-quarter of the current operating hours for each circuit. The circuit with the lowest sum is started first. Changes to which circuit is the lead circuit and which is the lag are made when shutting off compressors.
On 30HX206-271 and 30GX205-350 units set for staged loading, the control fully loads the lead circuit before starting the lag circuit and unloads the lag circuit first. When these units are set for equal loading, the control maintains nearly equal capacities in each circuit when the chiller is loading and unloading.
7
Page 8
TERMINAL BLOCK
21
22
23
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR
1
2
3
L1
L2
L3
T1
1
2
T1
3
T3
JUMPER BARS
COMPRESSOR JUNCTION BOX
1
2
3
Fig. 2 — Across-the Line (XL) Compressor Wiring
6
4
5
TERMINAL BLOCK
21
22
23
1
2
3
COMPRESSOR STARTER ASSEMBLY
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
1M
2M
S
Fig. 3 — Wye-Delta Compressor Wiring
CAPACITY SEQUENCE DETERMINATION ( ) — This is configurable as equal circuit loading or staged circuit loading with the default set at staged. The control determines the order in which the steps of capacity for each circuit are changed. This control choice does NOT have any impact on machines with only 2 compressors.
MINIMUM LOAD VALVE ( ) — When this option is installed and configured, the first stage of capacity is altered by energizing the Minimum Load valve relay. Once the control requires more capacity, the minimum load valve is deenergized and normal capacity staging resumes with loaders and com­pressors. Similarly, the Minimum Load valve relay will be energized for the last stage of capacity to be used before t he circuit is shut down.
Configure Unit for Minimum Load Control
— The chiller must be configured for minimum load control operation. This may be done using the unit keypad (HSIO-2). Set the LOCAL/ OFF/REMOTE (LOR) switch in the OFF position.
COMPRESSOR JUNCTION BOX
T2
T3
T1
T3
T1
T1
T2
T3
T2
1
2
3
21
1
2
22
23
3
6
4
6
4
5
5
1. Press on the keypad.
2. Press the down arrow until the display reads: MIN. LOAD V AL V E SELECT DISABLE
3. T o enable the minimum load valve feature, press
ENTER
.
4. The display may read as follows. (If not, skip to Step 7.) P ASSWORD PROTECTED FUNCTION ENTER P ASSWORD
5. Press .
ENTER
6. The HSIO-2 again displays the following: MIN. LOAD V AL V E SELECT DISABLE
7. Press . The display changes to:
ENTER
MIN. LOAD V AL V E SELECT ENABLE
8
Page 9
The chiller is now configured for minimum load valve
control. Test Minimum Load Relay Outputs
— After the unit is re­configured, test the operation of the relay and solenoid valve using the Quick Test software function. Test Circuit A as fol­lows (the LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE (LOR) switch must be in the OFF position):
1. Press on the HSIO-2 keypad.
2. Press the down arrow until the display reads:
MIN. LOAD V AL VE A RELA Y IS OFF
3. Press .
ENTER
4. The display may read as follows. (If not, skip to Step 7.)
P ASSWORD PROTECTED FUNCTION ENTER P ASSWORD
5. Press .
ENTER
6. The HSIO-2 again displays the following:
MIN. LOAD V AL VE A RELA Y IS OFF
7. Press to energize the relay. The display reads:
ENTER
MIN. LOAD V AL VE A RELA Y IS ON An audible click will be heard. Verify that the solenoid valve for Circuit A is energized.
8. Press to turn off the minimum load valve relay for
ENTER
Circuit A.
To check the operation of the solenoid valve on Circuit B, follow the same procedure as the preceding, but enter in Step 1, instead of . The display screens will be fo r Circuit B instead of A.
Adjust Setting of Minimum Load Ball Valve
— The mini­mum load ball valve must be adjusted to suit the application. Calibrate one circuit at a time as follows:
1. Adjust the ball valve so that it is approximately half open.
2. Operate the chiller in Manual Control mode, with one circuit
operating, and all compressor loaders deenergized. See Man­ual Control Mode section on page 32 for further information.
3. Record the cooler ∆T (the difference between cooler enter-
ing fluid temperature and cooler leaving fluid temperature) at this fully unloaded condition.
4. Use the Manual Control feature to enable the minimum load
valve for the circuit that is operating.
5. Observe and record the cooler ∆T with the minimum load
valve energized.
6. Adjust the minimum load ball valve until the cooler temper-
ature difference reading from Step 5 is equal to half of the temperature difference reading from Step 3.
7. Open the ball valve to decrease the temperature difference or
close the ball valve to increase the temperature difference (∆T). When the valve is adjusted correctly, the difference between cooler entering and leaving fluid temperatures when the minimum load control is energized must be at least half of the temperature difference when the minimum load control is deenergized. For example, if the difference between the cooler entering and leaving water temperature is 3° F with the valve deenergized, then the difference between cooler entering and leaving water temperature must be at least 1.5° F with the valve energized.
Once the outputs have been tested and the ball valve ad­justed, the installation is complete. Disable manual control and return chiller to desired operational status.
CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES — The following overrides will modify the normal operation of the routine.
Deadband Multiplier
— The user configurable Deadband Multiplier ( ) has a default value of 1.0. The range is from 1.0 to 4.0. When set to other than 1.0, this factor is ap­plied to the capacity Load/Unload Factor. The larger this value is set, the longer the control will delay between adding or re­moving stages of capacity. Figure 4 shows how compressor starts can be reduced over time if the leaving water temperature is allowed to drift a larger amount above and below the set point. This value should be set in the range of 3.0 to 4.0 for sys­tems with small loop volumes.
First Stage Override
— If the current capacity stage is zero, the control will modify the routine with a 1.2 factor on adding the first stage to reduce cycling. This factor is also applied when the control is attempting to remove the last stage of capacity.
Slow Change Override
— The control prevents the capacity stages from being changed when the leaving fluid temperature is close to the set point (within an adjustable deadband) and moving towards the set point.
Ramp Loading
( ) — Limits the rate of change of leav­ing fluid temperature. If the unit is in a Cooling mode and con­figured for Ramp Loading, the control makes 2 comparisons before deciding to change stages of capacity. The control calcu­lates a temperature difference betw een the control point and leaving fluid temperature. If the difference is greater tha n 4° F (2.2° C) and the rate of change (°F or °C per minute) is more than the configured Cooling Ramp Loading value ( ), the control does not allow any changes to the current stage of capacity.
Low Entering Fluid Temperature Unloading
— When the entering fluid temperature is below the control point, the con­trol will attempt to remove 25% of the current stages being used. If exactly 25% cannot be removed, the control removes an amount greater than 25%, but no more than necessary. The lowest stage will not be removed.
Low Discharge Superheat
— If a circuit’s discharge superheat
is less than 15° F (8.3° C), the control does not increase the cur­rent capacity stage. If the discharge superheat is le ss than 5° F (2.8° C) and decreasing, the circuit is unloaded every 30 sec­onds until the superheat is greater than 5° F (2.8° C). The final capacity stage is not unloaded unless an alarm condition exists. This override is ignored for the first 3 minutes after a compres­sor is started.
Low Saturated Suction Temperature
— To avoid freezing the cooler, the control will compare the cir cuit Saturated Suction temperature with a pre determined freeze point. If the cooler fluid selected is water, the freeze point is 28 F (–2.2 C). If the cooler fluid selected is bri ne, the freeze poi nt is 8° F (4.4 ° C) below the cooling set point (lower of 2 cooling set points for dual configuration). If the saturated suction temperature is below the freeze point, the unit capacity is not allowed to increase.
For brine applications, the freeze point (Brine Freeze Point) can be entered by pressing and scrolling 12 items down. The cont rol will use the B rine Freeze Point va lue less 6° F (3.3° C) as the freeze point to compare with the Saturated Suction temperature. The default for t he Brine Freez e Point is 34 F (1.1 C) which means the control will use 28 F (–2.2 C) as the freeze point. The brine freeze point is adjustable from –15 F to 34 F (–26.1 to 1.1 C).
9
Page 10
For water [brine] circuits, if t he Sat urat ed Suct ion tempera ­ture falls below 34 F (1.1 C) [th e Brine F reeze Poi nt], the unit capacity will not increase. If the Saturated Suction temperature falls below 28 F (–2.2 C), [the Brine Freeze Point minus 6° F (3.3° C)], for 90 seconds, all loaders in the circuit are turned off. If this condition continues for a total of 3 minutes, the cir­cuit will alarm and shut down.
High Condensing Temperature Unloading
— Every 10 sec­onds the control checks for the conditions below. Loaders will be cycled as needed to control the saturated condensing tem­perature below the configured maximum condensing tempera­ture. Configured maximums are 154 F (67.8 C) for 30GX, 152 F (66.7 C) for 30HXA, and 122 F (50 C) for 30HXC units. If a circuit’s saturated condensing temperature is more than 12° F (6.7° C) below the maximum condensing temperature, the circuit capacity is not allowed to increase. If the saturated condensing temperature is more than 2° F (1.1° C) above the maximum condensing temperature for 60 seconds, a loader is turned off. If the saturated condensing temperature rises to more than 5° F (2.8° C) above the maximum condensing tem­perature during the 60 seconds, a loader is turned off immedi­ately. If all the loaders were already off, the compressor is shut down and an alarm is generated.
MOP (Maximum Operating Pressure) Override
— The con­trol monitors saturated condensing and suction temperature for each circuit as well as differential oil pressure. Based on a con­figurable maximum operating set point (saturated suction tem­perature), set maximum condensing temperature, and mini­mum differential oil pressure, the control may reduce the num­ber of capacity stages being used and/or may lower the EXD position when system pressures approach the set parameters.
Head Pressure Control
GENERAL — The microprocessor controls the condenser fans (30GX) or water val v e (30HX C ) to maintain the saturated condensing temperature to a configurable set point. The 30HXA condenserless units with a 09DK condenser use a combination of factory-supplied fan cycling pressure switches (shipped in the 30HXA control box), temperature switches, and an accessory Motormaster 50DJ902811) or Motormaster III (part no. 30GT910-079) con­trol to control head pressure independent of 30HXA unit con­trol. The fans are staged or speed varied (30GX) or water valve controlled (30HXC) based on each circuit’s saturated condens­ing temperature and compressor status. Water cooled units (30HXC) operating at less than 70 F (21.1 C) for entering con­denser water require the use of head pressure control.
The chiller must be field configured for the options shown
in T able 6. Fan stage settings are shown in Table 7.
®
(part no. 50DJ902801 or
AIR-COOLED UNITS (30GX) — See Fig. 5 for condenser fan locations.
Without Motormaster® Control
— The first stage of fans are turned on based on compressor status or a Head Pressure Set Point based on Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT). Additional fan stages are added when the SCT exceeds the Head Pressure Set Point. The Head Pressure Se t Point is con­figurable in the Set Point subfunction. The default is 113 F (45 C). Once a fan stage has been added, the software tempo­rarily modifies the head pressure set point by adding 15° F (8.3° C) for 35 seconds. A fan stage will be removed when the Saturated Condensing Temperature has been less than the Head Pressure Set Point minus 35 F (19.4 C) for 2 minutes. The control uses the higher of the 2 Saturated Condensing Temperature values for 30GX080-150 and 160 units. For the 30GX151 and 161-350 units, each circuit’s fan stages are inde­pendently controlled based on the circuit Saturated Condens­ing Temperature. Refer to Table 7 for condenser fan control information. See Fig. 6A.
With Motormaster Control
— For low-ambient operation, the lead fan in each circuit can be equipped with the optional or accessory Motormaster III head pressure controller. If factory installed, the controller will be configured for 4 to 20 mA con­trol. With the Motormaster III option enabled, the PSIO-1 module calculates the required output based on Saturated Con­densing temperature, Head Pressure set point, and a PID (pro­portional integral derivative) loop calculation. This 4 to 20 mA output is driven through the PSIO-2 module. Proportional, Integral, and Derivative gain parameters for air cooled controls are adjustable and can be found in the Service subfunction. Checkout and adjustment of the PID loop should only be performed by certified Carrier Comfort Network technicians. To obtain this accessory for field installation, order by part number 30GX-900---012 for a single controller package (30GX080-150 and 160). Order part number 30GX-900---014 for a dual controller package (30GX151 and 161-350). These packages contain all the hardware required to install the acces­sory . See Fig. 6B.
The control will use the higher of the 2 Saturated Condens­ing Temperature values for 30GX080-150 and 160 units. For the 30GX151 and 161-350 units, each circuit’s fan stages are independently controlled based on the circuit Saturated Con­densing Temperature. Refer to Table 8 for condenser fan stag­ing information.
47
8
7
LWT (C)
6
5
LEGEND
LWT —
Leaving Water Temperature
46 45 44
43
LWT (F)
42 41
0 200 400 600 800 1000
STANDARD DEADBAND
DEADBAND EXAMPLE
TIME (SECONDS)
Fig. 4 — Deadband Multiplier
10
2 STARTS
3 STARTS
MODIFIED DEADBAND
Page 11
Table 6 — Field Configured Chiller Options
UNIT CONFIGURATION OPTION DESCRIPTION HSIO LOCATION FACTORY CONFIGURED?
Fan Staging Select Air cooled staging method Yes. See Table 7
30GX
30HXC
Motormaster® Control Select Applies to air cooled units only
Water Valve Type Applies to water cooled unit only
Set to 1 to enable (Motormaster only)
Set to 1 = 4 to 20 mA, 2 = 2 to 10 V,
Yes. 0 = None
Yes. 0 = None
3 = 20 to 4 mA, 4 = 10 to 2 V
Table 7 — Fan Staging Settings for Air Cooled (30GX) Units
UNIT 30GX DESCRIPTION OPTION NUMBER HSIO DISPLAY
080-105 106-125
136, 150, 160
151, 161, 175,
205, 225
176
206, 226, 250
251-350
LEGEND
SCT —
Saturated Condensing Temperature
1st stage compressor status and SCT set point 2nd stage common control based on highest SCT
1st stage compressor status and SCT set point 2nd and 3rd stage common control based on highest SCT
1st stage compressor status and SCT set point 2nd through 4th stage common control based on highest SCT
1st stage each circuit, compressor status 2nd stage Circuit B independent 2nd and 3rd stage Circuit A independent
1st stage each circuit, compressor status 2nd and 3rd stage each circuit independent
1st stage each circuit, compressor status 2nd stage Circuit B independent 2nd, 3rd and 4th stage Circuit A independent
1st stage each circuit, compressor status 2nd, 3rd and 4th stage each circuit independent
12 Com_1cmp 14 Com_2cmp 16 Com_3cmp
7 A2B1_stg
3 Ind_2stg
9 A3B2_cmp
5 Ind_3stg
WATER-COOLED UNITS (30HXC) — The 30HXC chillers can be configured to control direct or reverse-acting water valves that are controlled by a 4 to 20 mA signal. A 2 to10 vdc signal can be used by installing a 500-ohm
1
/2 watt resistor across the 2 output terminals of the 4 to 20 mA signal. The 4 to 20 mA control scheme reads the saturated condensing temper­ature and uses a PID (proportional integral deriative) loop to control the head pressure. Proportional, Integral and Derivative gain parameters for the water cooled controls are adjustable and can be found in the Service subfunction. Checkout and adjustment of the PID loop should only be performed by certi­fied Carrier Comfort Network technicians.
CONDENSERLESS UNITS (30HXA) — The remote con­denser fans are controlled by 2 relays with the 30HXA control box. See Field Wiring section on page 73 for wiring details. The 30HXA control must be configured to turn the 09DK fans on and/or off. To set the 30HXA control for this configuration Unit T ype under must be changed to 3 (Split System). Next, under , Head Pressure Control Type must be changed to 1 (Air Cooled), and Condenser Pump control must be set to 0 (Not Controlled).
The 30HXA control does not support a 4 to 20 mA or a 2 to 10 vdc output for fan speed control. Instead, head pressure con­trol is accomplished with fan cycling pressure switches (09DK054-094), temperature switches (09DK044, 074-094) and Motormaster control. Motormaster and Motormaster III control is used with temperature sensor input to control con­denser fan speed. See accessory installation instructions for further information.
09DK CONDENSING UNITS 09DK044 Units
— The 09DK044 units have accessory provi­sion for fully automatic intermediate-season head pressure control through condenser fan cycling. Fan number 2 and 3 cycling is controlled by outdoor-air temperature through air temperature switches (ATS) 1 and 2.
The air temperature switches are located in the low er divid­er panel underneath the coil header. The sensing element is ex­posed to air entering the no. 1 fan compartment through a hole in the panel. Fan no. 1 is non-cycling.
The air temperature switch controls the fans as shown in Table 9.
09DK054-094
— The capacity of an air-cooled condenser in­creases with increased temperature difference (defined as satu­rated condenser temperature minus entering outdoor-air tem­perature) and decreases with decreased temperature difference. A drop in entering outdoor-air temperature results in a lower saturated condensing temperature. When outdoor-air tempera­ture drops below the minimum temperature for standard units, additional head pressure control is required.
Model 09DK units have fully automatic intermediate­season head pressure control through condenser fan cycling using electromechanical fan cycling controls. Standard head pressure controls regulate the 100 and 50/50% condenser capacity applications. Head pressure can also be controlled by fan cycling controls supplemented by the accessory Motormaster III solid-state head pressure control. See Motor­master
III installation instructions for more information.
In the standard control scheme, fans 1 and 2 are on when there is a call for cooling from the respective coil circuits. Fans 1 and 2 are non-cycling. On 054 and 064 units, fans 3 and 4 are controlled by using a fan cycling pressure switch on each of the primary coil circuits in response to condensing pressure. On 074-094 units, fans 3 and 4 are controlled using a fan cycling pressure switch in each of the primary coil circuits in response to condensing pressure. Fans 5 and 6 are controlled by using two air temperature switches, which respond to the outdoor ambient temperature. The air temperature swit ches are locat ed on the control box shelf.
11
Page 12
Table 8 — 30GX080-350 Condenser Fan Staging (PSIO-1 Controlled)
30GX UNIT SIZE FAN TYPE FAN CONTACTOR FANS CONTROLLED FAN RELAY NO.*
080-105
106-125
136, 150, 160
151, 161, 175, 205, 225
176
206, 226, 250
251, 265
281-350
LEGEND
Comp. — FC —
*Fan Relay number displayed when using
Compressor Fan Contactor
Standard
High Static
Standard
High Static
Standard
High Static
Standard
High Static
Standard
High Static
Standard
High Static
Standard
High Static
Standard
High Static
to test fans.
FC-1 1, 2 5
FC-2 3, 4 1 FC-1, 1A 1, 2 5 FC-2, 2A 3, 4 1
FC-1 1, 2 5
FC-2 3, 4 1
FC-3 5, 6 2 FC-1, 1A 1, 2 5 FC-2, 2A 3, 4 1 FC-3, 3A 5, 6 2
FC-1 1, 2 5
FC-2 3, 4 1
FC-3 5, 6 2
FC-4 7, 8 2 FC-1, 1A 1, 2 5 FC-2, 2A 3, 4 1 FC-3, 3A 5, 6 2 FC-4, 4A 7, 8 2
FC-1 1, 2 Comp. B1 contactor†
FC-2 3, 4 3
FC-3 5, 6 2
FC-4 7, 8 Comp. A1/A2 contactor†
FC-5 9, 10 1 FC-1, 1A 1, 2 Comp. B1 contactor† FC-2, 2A 3, 4 3 FC-3, 3A 5, 6 2 FC-4, 4A 7, 8 Comp. A1/A2 contactor† FC-5, 5A 9, 10 1
FC-1 1, 2 Comp. B1 contactor†
FC-2 3, 4 3
FC-3 5, 6 4
FC-4 7, 8 Comp. A1 contactor†
FC-5 9, 10 1
FC-6 11, 12 2 FC-1, 1A 1, 2 Comp. B1 contactor† FC-2, 2A 3, 4 3 FC-3, 3A 5, 6 4 FC-4, 4A 7, 8 Comp. A1 contactor† FC-5, 5A 9, 10 1 FC-6, 6A 11, 12 2
FC-1 1, 2 Comp. B1 contactor†
FC-2 3, 4 3
FC-3 5, 6 1
FC-4 7, 8 Comp. A1/A2 contactor†
FC-5 9, 10 2
FC-6 11, 12 2 FC-1, 1A 1, 2 Comp. B1 contactor† FC-2, 2A 3, 4 3 FC-3, 3A 5, 6 1 FC-4, 4A 7, 8 Comp. A1/A2 contactor† FC-5, 5A 9, 10 2 FC-6, 6A 11, 12 2
FC-1 2, 4 1
FC-2 6, 8 2
FC-3 1 Comp. B1 contactor†
FC-4 3 3
FC-5 5, 7 4
FC-6 9, 10 Comp. A1/A2 contactor†
FC-7 11, 12 2
FC-8 13, 14 2 FC-1, 1A 2, 4 1 FC-2, 2A 6, 8 2
FC-3 1 Comp. B1 contactor†
FC-4 3 3 FC-5, 5A 5, 7 4 FC-6, 6A 9, 10 Comp. A1/A2 contactor† FC-7, 7A 11, 12 2 FC-8, 8A 13, 14 2
FC-1 1, 2 Comp. B1/B2 contactor†
FC-2 3, 4 3
FC-3 5, 6 4
FC-4 7, 8 4
FC-5 9, 10 1
FC-6 11, 12 Comp. A1/A2 contactor†
FC-7 13, 14 2
FC-8 15, 16 2 FC-1, 1A 1, 2 Comp. B1/B2 contactor† FC-2, 2A 3, 4 3 FC-3, 3A 5, 6 4 FC-4, 4A 7, 8 4 FC-5, 5A 9, 10 1 FC-6, 6A 11, 12 Comp. A1/A2 contactor† FC-7, 7A 13, 14 2 FC-8, 8A 15, 16 2
†Proper rotation of these fans to be checked when compressor(s) is running. See Fig. 5 for
condenser fan locations when viewing from the control box end.
NOTE: For 30GX151, 161-350 units, fan relays 1 and 2 energize Circuit A fans. Fan relays 3 and 4 energize Circuit B fans.
12
Page 13
Table 9 — Air Temperature Switch Control
(09DK044 Units)
FAN FAN SWITCH TEMPERATURE
ON
FAN 2
OFF
ON
FAN 3
OFF
Above 65 ± 3 F (18.3 ± 1.7 C) Between 55 and 65 F (12.8 and 18.3 C)
and temperature falling Below 55 ± 3 F (12.8 ± 1.7 C) Between 55 and 65 F (12.8 and 18.3 C)
and temperature rising Above 80 ± 3 F (26.7 ± 1.7 C) Between 70 and 80 F (21.1 and 26.7 C)
and temperature falling Below 70 ± 3 F (21.1 ± 1.7 C) Between 70 and 80 F (21.1 and 26.7 C)
and temperature rising
The fan cycling pressure switch controls the fans as follows:
Fans 3 and 4 are on above 185 ± 10 psig (1276 ± 69 kPa) and off below 97 ± 10 psig (669 ± 69 kPa). If pressure is rising be­tween 97 psig (669 kPa) and 185 psig (1276 kPa), fans 3 and 4 are off. If pressure is falling from 185 psig (1276 kPa) to 97 psig (669 kPa) fans 3 and 4 are on.
30GX080-105 30GX106-125 30GX136,150,160
4
2
CONTROL BOX END
2
4
The 09DK054-094 condensers are supplied with fan cy­cling pressure switches suitable for use with R-22 refrigerant. Fan cycling pressure switches that are compatible with R-134a refrigerant pressures are shipped with the 30HXA chillers. These fan cycling pressure switches must be installed in place of the 09DK factory-installed switches before charging to en­sure proper head pressure control.
The air temperature switch controls th e fans as foll ows: On the 074-094 condensers, below 70
±
3 F (21.1 ± 1.7 C) outdoor ambient, fans 5 and 6 are off; above 80 ± 3 F (26.7 ± 1.7 C) fans 5 and 6 are on. Between 70 F (21.1 C) and 80 F (26.7 C), whether fans 5 and 6 are on or off depends on whether temper­ature is rising or falling. If the temperature is rising from 70 F (21.1 C) to 80 F (26.7 C), fans 5 and 6 are off. If the tempera­ture is falling from 80 F (26.7 C) to 70 F (21.1 C), fans 5 and 6 are on.
6
CONTROL BOX END
24 6 8
CONTROL BOX END
1
10
9
CONTROL BOX END
3
1
3
5
13 5 7
30GX151,161,175,205,225 30GX176
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
CONTROL BOX END
1
12
7911
30GX206,226,250 30GX251,265
10
3
1
2
4
5
7
8
6
11
9
12
10
12
14
13
9
11
30GX281-350
10
16
12
14
8
6
4
2
6810
4
2
CONTROL BOX END
3
5
8
6
5
7
1
4
2
CONTROL BOX END
1
3
15
13
9
11
5
7
1
3
Fig. 5 — 30GX Condenser Fan Locations
13
CONTROL BOX END
Page 14
30GX UNITS — MOTORMASTER III CONTROL NOT INSTALLED
LEGEND
Saturated Condensing Temper ature
SCT —
Fig. 6A — 30GX Head Pressure Control Without Motormaster
30GX UNITS — MOTORMASTER III CONTROL INSTALLED
READ CIRCUIT SATURATED CONDENSING TEMPERATURE AND CURRENT FAN STAGE
IS SCT GREATER THAN HEAD PRESSURE SET POINT PLUS 15°F (8.3°C)?
YES
INCREASE CURRENT FAN STAGE BY ONE
NO
Fig. 6B — 30GX Head Pressure Control Without Motormaster III Control
ADJUSTING PID ROUTINES — The 30GX and 30HXC head pressure control routines use PID (proportional integral derivative) loops to maintain a user-configurable head pressure set point. Gain defaul t values are located in the Service func­tion. See page 32. The current values can be read under
from the HSIO. The control calculates a new fan speed (30GX) or water valve position (30HXC) every 5 sec­onds based on these gain values and an error term equal to sat­urated condensing temperature minus head pressure set point. If the control routine is not responding fast enough to large changes (circuit starting, for example), increase the propor­tional term.
When the routine is making too great a change to valve po­sition or fan speed, decrease the proportional term. To mini­mize hunting, keep the integral term positive and as low as pos­sible. This value is used to control “droop,” which is common in master/submaster control schemes. The default for the deriv­ative term is zero. The value should not need to be changed.
Cooler and Condenser (30HXC) Pump Con­trol —
cooler and condenser (30HXC) pump control. Inputs for a
The 30GX and 30HX chillers can be configured for
®
III Control
CALCULATE NEW PID VALUE. DOES OUTPUT REQUIRE MORE FANS?
YES
INCREASE CURRENT FAN STAGE BY ONE
OUTPUT NEW mA SIGNAL TO CONTROLLER
NO
DOES PID OUTPUT REQUIRE LESS FANS?
YES
DECREASE CURRENT FAN STAGE BY ONE
NO
cooler flow switch or interlock and condenser flow switch are also provided.
COOLER PUMP CONTROL — Proper configuration of the cooler pump control and cooler pump interlock is required to prevent possible cooler freeze-up. The cooler pump interlock should always be enabled. This prevents the chiller from oper­ating unless chilled water flow is detected. See page 73 of the Field Wiring section for proper connection of the chilled water flow switch and cooler pump interlock.
The factory default setting for cooler pump control is “0” (not controlled). It is recommended for 30GX packaged air­cooled chillers that the cooler pump control be utilized unless the chilled water pump runs continuously or the chilled water system contains a suitable anti-freeze solution. The cooler pump relay is energized when the chiller enters an occupied mode. In the event a freeze protection alarm is generated t he cooler pump relay is also energized. If the cooler heater is being used and has been on for more than 15 minutes during saturated suction freeze protection, the cooler pump relay is energized.
When the cooler pump control is set to “0” and the cooler pump interlock is set to “1” an alarm 53 will be generated if flow is not proven within one minute after the unit is enabled and in an occupied mode.
14
Page 15
When the cooler pump control is set to “1” and the cooler
CLEAR
ENTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
.
-
STAT
SET
SCHD
EXPN EDIT
SRVC
HIST
ALGO
TEST ALRM
TWENTY-FOUR CHARACTER TWO-LINE LCD DISPLAY
LEGEND
LCD —
Liquid Crystal Display
Fig. 7 — Keypad and Display Module
pump interlock is set to “1” an alarm 53 will be generated if flow is not proven within one minute after the cooler pump re­lay is energized. An alarm 55 will be generated if the interlock contacts remain closed when the cooler pump relay is off. In ei­ther cooler pump control configuration, alarm 54 will be gener­ated whenever the cooler pump interlock is open for at least 5 seconds during operation.
CONDENSER PUMP CONTROL ( ) — Factory de­faults for both condenser pump control and condenser flow switch are set to “Not Controlled” and “Disabled,” respec­tively. The condenser pump can be controlled in one of two ways: In the first method, the pump can be controlled like the cooler pump — it is turned on whenever the machine is in the on state and turned off otherwise (set to “1” using the Service function). The second method of control is to turn the pump on when the fir st compresso r is started and off when the last com­pressor is turned off (set to “2” using the Service function). With the flow switched enabled, the control checks the status of the input one minute after starting the pump. An alarm 49 is generated if the flow switch input is not closed.
Cooler Heater Control —
Accessory cooler heaters can be ordered for the 30GX chillers. If installed and e nabled, these heaters are turned on only when the machine is in the off state and the chiller is in a saturated suction temperature freeze condition.
Oil Heater Control —
Standard feature that controls oil temperature based on Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT). Heaters turn on at <105 F (40.6 C) SCT, and turn off at >110 F (43.3 C) SCT.
Keypad and Display Module (Also Called HSIO-II) —
cate with the processor. It is used to enter configurations and set points and to read data, perform tests, and set schedules. The device consists of a keypad with 7 function keys, 5 opera­tive keys, 12 numeric keys (0 to 9, •, and -), and a 2-line, 24-character alphanumeric liquid crystal display . See Fig. 7.
ACCESSING FUNCTIONS AND SUBFUNCTIONS — Table 10 shows a brief description of the keypad buttons. Table 11A shows the 6 functions (identified by name) and the subfunctions (identified by number). Table 11B shows the 6 functions (identified by name) and the subfunctions (identi­fied by number) when using the optional remote enhanced dis­play controller. Table 12 shows a brief example on how to access subfunctions.
NOTE: It is not necessary to use the through every item in a subfunction. For example, if you wanted to read the oil pressure for the A1 compressor, press , then
procedure to view an item near the bottom of a subfunction. To view Condenser Pump Flow Switch status, press ,
, and . This procedure is available in all functions
except the TEST function. AUTOMATIC DEF AULT DISPLAY — When the keypad has
not been used for 10 minutes, the display automatically switches to the rota tin g a uto ma ti c defa u lt d isp la y. This display contains the 5 parts shown below .
Entering Fluid T emp
Leaving Fluid T emp
Percent Total Capacity
This module allows the operator to communi-
press to go directly to A1 Oil Pre ssure. Use a similar
xx.x° F xx.x° F
xxx.x%
Table 10 — Keypad and Display Module Usage
FUNCTION
KEYS
OPERATIVE
KEYS
CLEAR
ENTER
STATUS — For displaying diagnostic codes and current operating information about the machine.
HISTORY — For displaying run time, cycles, and previous alarms.
SERVICE — For entering specific unit configur ation information and enabling manual control function.
SCHEDULE — For entering occupied/unoccupied schedules for unit operation.
ALGORITHM — Not used. SET POINT — For entering operating set points
and daytime information. TEST — For testing operating of the analog and
discrete outputs.
EXPAND — For displaying a non-abbreviated expansion of the display.
CLEAR — For clearing the screen of all displays. UP ARROW — For returning to previous display
position. DOWN ARROW — For advancing to next display
position. ENTER — For entering data.
USE
USE
T ota l Num ber of A larm s
xx
MODES : MODE_TBL Current active modes
All functions are made up of a group of subfunctions. To en­ter a subfunction, first press the subfunction number desired. Then press the function key in which the subfunction resides. To move within that subfunction, press the up or down arrow keys. Another subfunction may be entered at any time by pressing the subfunction number, then the function key. De­pending on system type and configuration, all displays may not be shown.
15
Page 16
SUBFUNCTION NO.
Table 11A — HSIO Functions and Subfunctions
FUNCTIONS
Status Test Schedule Service History Set Point
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Alarm Display Circuit A
General Pa r ameters Circuit B
Circuit A Analog Values
Circuit A Discrete Inputs/ Outputs Table
Circuit B Analog Values
Circuit B Discrete Inputs/ Outputs Table Unit Analog Parameters Miscellaneous Inputs/Outputs Operating Modes — Holiday 06
Capacity Control — Holiday 07
Dual Chiller — Holiday 08
®
Ice Build Occupancy Schedule
Local/Normal Occupancy Schedule Remote CCN Occupancy Schedule
Holiday 01 Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration
Configuration*
Discrete Outputs
Discrete Outputs
Unit Discrete Outputs
Valves and Motormaster Control
—Holiday 02
—Holiday 03
—Holiday 04
—Holiday 05
Factory Configuration
Options Configuration1
Options Configuration 2
Reset/Demand Limit Configuration
Machine Configuration Codes
———
Transducer Calibration
Manual Control — —
Master /Slave Configuration
———
———
Operating Hours Set Point s
Alarm History English/Metric
— Bus Address
— Time/Date
Configuration
— CCN
Enable/Disable
——
——
*Subfunctions through are for configuring Holidays 09 through 30.
16
Page 17
Table 11B — Functions and Subfunctions Cross-Reference for the
Optional Remote Enhanced Display Controller
The optional Remote Enhanced Display controller cross reference table below can be used as a guide to access the same information outlined in the HSIO functions and subfunctions table (see Table 11A). For example, in Table 11A, the alarm history is accessed through the HSIO by pressing 2 and the History button on the keypad (see Table 10). The Remote En­hanced Display cross reference table lists the menu item from
the Remote Enhanced Display which contains the alarm histo­ry information. In another example, from Table 11A, pressing 3 and the Status button on the HSIO keypad will access the cir­cuit A analog values. In the table below, the circuit A analog values are accessed by selecting STATUS CIRCA_AN from the appropriate Remote Enhanced Display menu.
HSIO SUBFUNCTION
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
HSIO FUNCTION KEY
Status Test Schedule Service History Set Point
STATUS A_UNIT_1
STATUS A_UNIT_1
STATUS CIRCA_AN
STATUS CIRA_DIO
STATUS CIRCB_AN
STATUS CIRB_DIO
STATUS UNIT_2
STATUS UNIT_3
STATUS MODE_TBL
SERVICE CONTROL ALGORITHM STATUS LOADFACT
SERVICE CONTROL ALGORITHM STATUS LEADLAG
SERVICE CONTROL TEST
SERVI C E CONTROL TEST
SERVI C E CONTROL TEST
SERVI C E CONTROL TEST
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SCHEDULE OCCPC01S
SCHEDULE OCCPC02S
SCHEDULE OCCPC65S
SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION HOLIDAY,HOLDY_01
SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION HOLIDAY,HOLDY_02
SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION HOLIDAY,HOLDY_03
SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION HOLIDAY,HOLDY_04
SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION HOLIDAY,HOLDY_05
SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION HOLIDAY,HOLDY_06
SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION HOLIDAY,HOLDY_07
SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION HOLIDAY,HOLDY_08*
SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION
SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION OPTIONS1
SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION OPTIONS2
SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION RESETCON
SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION CONCODES
SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION EXV TESTS
SERVICE EQUIPMENT SERVICE CALIBRTE
SERVICE EQUIPMENT SERVICE MAN_CTRL
SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION MSTR_SL V
———
———
SERVIC E EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION STRTHOUR
SERVIC E ALARM HISTORY
—
—
—
——
——
——
——
SETPOINT
SERVICE LID CONFIGURATION
SERVICE CONTROLLER IDENTIFICATION
SERVICE EQUIPMENT SERVICE TIME AND DATE
STATUS A_UNIT_1
*Subfunctions through are for configuring Holidays 09 through 30
NOTE: The optional Remote Enhanced Display controller uses the same password (1111) as the HSIO.
, and are also found under Service, Equipment Configuration.
17
Page 18
Table 12 — Accessing Functions and Subfunctions
OPERATION KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY RESPONSE
To access a function, press subfunction no. and function name key. Display shows sub­function group.
To move to other elements, scroll up or down using arrow keys.
When the last element in a subfunction has been displayed, the first element is repeated.
To move to next subfunction it is not necessary to use subfunction number. Press function name key to advance display through all subfunctions within a function and then back to the first.
Circuit A Discrete Outputs Loader A1
Relay is OFF Loader A2
Relay is OFF Minimum Load Valve A
Relay is OFF Circuit A Oil Heater
Relay is OFF A1 Mtr. Cooling Solenoid
Relay is OFF A2 Mtr. Cooling Solenoid
Relay is OFF Circuit A Oil Pump
Relay is OFF Oil Solenoid A1
Relay is OFF Oil Solenoid A2
Relay is OFF Loader A1
Relay is OFF Circuit B Discrete Outputs Unit Discrete Outputs Valves and Motor Master Circuit A Discrete Outputs
To move to another function, either depress function name key for desired function (display shows the first subfunction), or Access a specific sub­function by using the sub­function number and the function name key.
Alarms : xx Reset Alarms : 1 <ENTER>
CIR. A DISCRETE OUTPUTS
18
Page 19
ST ATUS FUNCTION — This function shows the rotating dis­play, current status of alarm and alert (diagnostic) codes, capacity stages, operating modes, chilled water set point, all measured system temperatures and pressures, analog inputs, and switch inputs. Refer to Table 13 for a complete description of the function.
Alarms/Alerts
— Alarms and alerts are mess ages that one or more faults have been detected. The alarms and alerts indicat e failures that cause the unit to shut down, terminate an option (such as reset) or result in the use of a default value such as a set point. Refer to the Troubleshooting section for more information.
Up to 10 alarms/alerts can be stored at once. To view them, press . The control will display the current total num­ber of alarms/alerts. Use the arrow keys to scroll through the list. Press the key when needed to view the full description of an alarm or alert. Press to clear all the alarms. Se e
ENTER
T able 14.
IMPORTANT: Do not clear the alarms without first
reviewing the full list and investigating and correcting
the cause of t he a lar ms .
When an alarm or alert is s tored in the display and the ma­chine automatically resets, the al arm/alert is deleted. Codes for safeties which do not automatically reset are not deleted until the problem is corrected and the machine is reset. To clear manual reset alarms from the CPM modules, the reset button on the HSIO bracket must be pressed. Next, switch the LOR switch to OFF and back to Local or Remote position (default alarm clearing method). Press and then to
ENTER
clear the alarm from the PSIO if the default LOR reset function has been disabled.
General Parameters
— General operating parameters are dis­played including control mode, run status, CCN status, and the 5 most current alarms. Press to display these and the other values as shown in T able 13.
Circuit A and B Analog and Discrete Information
— Cir­cuit A Analog Values can be vie wed by pre ssing and scrolling down to see current system operating conditions such as pressures and temperatures. Pressing will bring up Circuit A Discrete Inputs and Outputs. Scroll down to view the On/Off status of the compressor(s), loaders, solenoids, and pumps. Oil switch and feedback inputs are also displayed. Press and to view the identical ana log val­ues and discrete inputs and outputs for Circuit B. See Table 13 for a complete display.
Unit Analog Parameters and Temperature Reset
— Press
and scroll down to display the unit entering and leav­ing fluid temperatures as well as the temperature reset signal and calculated values.
Miscellaneous Inputs and Outputs
— Pressing and scrolling down will reveal the On/Off status of the condenser fans (30GX only). Also found here are the Demand Limit set­tings, pump relay and switch status, and miscellaneous items such as Heat/Cool and Dual Set Point switch positions. See Ta­ble 13 for a complete list.
— The operating modes are displayed to indicate the
Modes operating status of the unit at a given time. See Table 15 for a complete list of all mode s.
To enter the MODES subfunction, press and use the key to view all current modes of operation. See Table 16.
Capacity Control
— Pressing , this subfunction displays the load/unload factor, control point, and leaving wa­ter temperature. Scrolling down will also reveal the liquid level sensor values in degrees format.
Dual Chiller
— Pressing will access the dual chiller control status. This subfunction will display whether or not the chiller is operating as a Master or Slave, any alarm con­ditions present for dual chiller control, and lead/lag information for changeover. Dual chiller control is configured under
.
19
Page 20
Table 13 — Status Function and Subfunction Directory
SUBFUNCTION KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY COMMENT
1 Alarms
Alarms : xx Reset Alarms : 1 <ENTER>
All current alarms are displayed
Use as needed
2 General Parameters
3 Circuit A Analog Values
See Legend on page 25.
GENERAL PARAMETERS Control Mode Run Status
Off/On Occupied ?
Yes/ No CCN Enable
Off/On CCN Chiller Start/Stop
Start/Stop Alarm State
Normal/Alarm Current Alarm 1
x.xx Current Alarm 2
x.xx Current Alarm 3
x.xx Current Alarm 4
x.xx Current Alarm 5
x.xx Active Demand Limit
xxx.x% Percent Total Capacity
xxx.x% Water/Brine Setpoint
xx.x dF Control Point
xx.x dF Entering Fluid Temperature
xx.x dF Leaving Fluid Temperature
xx.x dF Emergency Stop
Emstop Minutes Left for Start
xx min Heat-Cool Status
Heat/Cool CIRCUIT A ANALOG VALUES Total Capacity
xxx.x% Available Capacity
xxx.x% Discharge Pressure
xxx.x PSI Suction Pressure
xxx.x PSI A1 Oil Pressure Diff.
xxx.x PSI A2 Oil Pressure Diff.
xxx.x PSI A1 Oil Pressure
xxx.x PSI A2 Oil Pressure
xxx.x PSI Discharge Gas Temperature
xxx.x dF A1 Motor Temperature
xxx.x dF A2 Motor Temperature
xxx.x dF
Displays LOCAL ON/OFF or CCN ON/OFF
Force/clear value with HSIO or CCN device. Must be ON for CCN clock control.
Percentage of total circuit capacity currently in use.
Percentage of Total Capacity value not in an alarm or fault condition.
20
Page 21
Table 13 — Status Function and Subfunction Directory (cont)
3 Circuit A Analog Values (cont) SAT Condensing Temp
4 Circuit A Discrete Inputs/Outputs
5 Circuit B Analog Values
SUBFUNCTION KEYPAD ENTR Y DISPLAY COMMENT
xxx.x dF Saturated Suction Temp
xxx.x dF EXV Percent Open
xxx.x% Motormaster Speed
xxx.x% Water Valve Position
xxx.x% Cooler Level Indicator
x.xx CPM A1 Feedback
x.x Volts CPM A2 Feedback
x.x Volts Circuit A Econ Pressure
xxx.x PSI CIR. A DISCRETE OUTPUTS Compressor A1
Off/On Compressor A2
Off/On Loader A1
Off/On Loader A2
Off/On Minimum Load Valve A
Off/On Circuit A Oil Heater
Off/On A1 Mtr Cooling Solenoid
Off/On A2 Mtr Cooling Solenoid
Off/On Circuit A Oil Pump
Off/On Oil Solenoid A1
Off/On Oil Solenoid A2
Off/On CIR. A DISCRETE INPUTS
Circuit A Oil Switch Open/Close
Compressor A1 Feedback Off/On
Compressor A2 Feedback Off/On
CIRCUIT A ANALOG VALUES Total Capacity
xxx.x% Available Capacity
xxx.x% Discharge Pressure
xxx.x PSI Suction Pressure
xxx.x PSI B1 Oil Pressure Diff.
xxx.x PSI B2 Oil Pressure Diff.
xxx.x PSI B1 Oil Pressure
xxx.x PSI B2 Oil Pressure
xxx.x PSI Discharge Gas Temperature
xxx.x dF
See Table 5. See Table 5.
Percentage of total circuit capacity currently in use.
Percentage of To tal Capacity value not in an alarm or fa ult condition.
21
Page 22
5 Circuit B Analog Values (cont)
SUBFUNCTION KEYPAD ENTR Y DISPLAY COMMENT
6 Circuit B Discrete Inputs/Outputs
7 Unit Analog Parameters
Table 13 — Status Function and Subfunction Directory (cont)
B1 Motor Temperature xxx.x dF
B2 Motor Temperature xxx.x dF
SAT Condensing Temp xxx.x dF
Saturated Suction Temp xxx.x dF
EXV Percent Open xxx.x%
Motormaster Speed xxx.x%
Water Valve Position xxx.x%
Cooler Level Indicator x.xx
CPM B1 Feedback x.x Volts
CPM B2 Feedback x.x Volts
Circuit B Econ Pressure xxx.x PSI
CIR. B DISCRETE OUTPUTS Compressor B1
Off/On Compressor B2
Off/On Loader B1
Off/On Loader B2
Off/On Minimum Load Valve B
Off/On Circuit B Oil Heater
Off/On B1 Mtr Cooling Solenoid
Off/On B2 Mtr Cooling Solenoid
Off/On Circuit B Oil Pump
Off/On Oil Solenoid B1
Off/On Oil Solenoid B2
Off/On CIR. B DISCRETE INPUTS
Circuit B Oil Switch Open/Close
Compressor B1 Feedback Off/On
Compressor B2 Feedback Off/On
UNITS ANALOG PARAMETERS Cooling Entering Fluid
xx.x dF Cooling Leaving Fluid
xx.x dF Condenser Entering Fluid
xx.x dF Condenser Leaving Fluid
xx.x dF Reclaim Entering Fluid
xx.x dF Reclaim Leaving Fluid
xx.x dF 5 Volt Supply
x.x Volts
See Table 5. See Table 5.
See Legend on page 25.
22
Page 23
7 Unit Analog Parameters (cont)
SUBFUNCTION KEYPAD ENTR Y DISPLAY COMMENT
8 Misc. Inputs/Outputs
9 Operating Modes
Table 13 — Status Function and Subfunction Directory (cont)
TEMPERATURE RESET 4-20 mA Reset Signal
xx.x mA Return Reset Signal
xx.x dF External Reset Signa l
xx.x dF Outdoor Air Temp
xx.x dF Calculated Reset
xx.x dF MISC INPUTS/OUTPUTS
FAN_1 Off/On
FAN_2 Off/On
FAN_3 Off/On
FAN_4 Off/On
FAN_5 Off/On
FAN_6 Off/On
DEMAND LIMIT 4-20 mA Demand Signal
x.xx mA Demand Switch 1
Off/On Demand Switch 2
Off/On CCN Loadshed Signal
Normal/Alarm Max Allowable CAP
xxx.x% PUMPS
Cooler Pump Relay Off/On
Cooler Pump Flow Switch Off/On
Condenser Pump Relay Off/On
Condenser Pump Flow Switch Off/On
MISCELLANEOUS Ice Valve
Off/On Ice Build Complete
Yes/N o Heat/Cool Switch
Heat/Cool Dual Set point Switch
Off/On Cooler Heater
Off/On Options Temperature 1
xx.x dF Options Temperature 2
xx.x dF MODES :MODE_TBL
mode name ON/OFF LOCAL OFF
CCN OFF
Not Used Not Used
Only active modes displayed Scroll with down arrow key to display
23
Page 24
9 Operating Modes (cont)
SUBFUNCTION KEYPAD ENTR Y DISPLAY COMMENT
Table 13 — Status Function and Subfunction Directory (cont)
CLOCK OFF LOCAL ON CCN ON CLOCK ON DUAL SP ACTIVE (1st SP) DUAL SP ACTIVE (2nd SP) TEMPERATURE RESET
ACTIVE DEMAND LIMIT ACTIVE
LOAD LIMIT ACTIVE LOW SOURCE TEMP PROTECT RAMP LOADING ACTIVE TIMED OVERRIDE ACTIVE LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMP WSM CONTROLLING SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE OFF TO ON DELA Y ACTIVE FSM CONTROLLING 2 CHILLR LEAD LAG ACTIVE 2 CHILLR LL COMM FAILURE CIR A LOW DISCHG SUPERHT CIR B LOW DISCHG SUPERHT CIR A HIGH SDT CIR B HIGH SDT
10 Capacity Control
See Legend on page 25.
CAPACITY CONTROL Load/Unload Factor
xxx.x% Control Point
xx.x dF Leaving Water Temp
xx.x dF MISC. INDICATORS
Liquid Lvl Sensor Cir. A xx.x dF
Liquid Lvl Sensor Cir. B xx.x dF
24
Page 25
11 Dual Chiller
Table 13 — Status Function and Subfunction Directory (cont)
SUBFUNCTION KEYPAD ENTR Y DISPLAY COMMENT
DUAL CHILLER Unit Master/Slave
0 / 1 / 2 Master / Slave Ctrl Active
Yes / N o Lead Chiller
1 / 2
0 = Neither 1 = Master 2 = Slave
1 = Master 2 = Slave
0 = Chiller OFF 1 = Valid Run State in CCN Mode 3 = Chiller in Local Mode 5 = Shutdown on Alarm 6 = Communications Failure
Yes if Lead / Lag Balance Enabled 1 = Master / S lave Have Same Address
2 = Master / Slave Communication Failure 3 = Chiller in Local Mode 4 = Slave Shutdown on Alarm(s) 5 = Master Configured for Heating 6 = No Slave Configured
CCN — Carrier Comfort Network CPM — Compressor Protection Module dF — Degrees Fahrenheit EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve FSM — Flotronic™ System Manager LL — Lead/Lag MTA — Must Trip Amps SAT — Saturated SDT — Saturated Discharge Temperature SP —Set Point WSM — Water System Manager
LEGEND
Slave Chiller State 0 / 1 / 3 / 5 / 6
Slave Chiller Total Cap xxx.x%
Lead / Lag Changeover Master / Slave Error
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6
Table 14 — Reading and Clearing Alarms
KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY COMMENT
ENTER
Alarm: 02 Reset Alarms: 1 <ENTER>
Comp A1 F ail - 1.80 Curr Alarm: 15:12 04/15/96
Comp A1 Fail - 1. 80 Cur rent Phase Reversal Alarm: 15:12 04/15/96
Compressor A1 Low Oil Pr Alarm: 10:34 04/15/96
Compressor A1 Low Oil Pressure Alarm: 10:34 04/15/96
Alarm: 02 Reset Alarms: 1 <ENTER>
Alarm: 00 Reset Alarms: 1 <ENTER>
Entering Fluid Temp xx.x dF
Leaving Fluid Temp xx.x dF
Percent Total Capacity xxx.x%
Total Number of Alarms xx
MODES: MODE_TBL List of All Curren t Modes
Press CPM Reset button first
Alarms reset and cleared
Returns to rotating default display
25
Page 26
Table 15 — Operational and Mode Display Codes
CODE DESCRIPTION
LOCAL OFF Unit is off. LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch is in OFF
CCN OFF Unit is off. LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch is in
CLOCK OFF Unit is off due to internal clock schedule. LOR
LOCAL ON Unit is on. LOR switch is in LOCAL position and
CCN ON Unit is on due to CCN command. LOR switch is in
CLOCK ON Unit is on due to internal clock schedule or occu-
DUAL SP ACTI VE (1st SP)
DUAL SP ACTI VE (2nd SP)
TEMPERATURE RESET ACTIVE
DEMAND LIMIT ACTIVE
FSM CONTROLLING
RAMP LOADING ACTIVE
TIMED OVERRIDE ACTIVE
WSM CONTROLLING
SLOW CHANGE OVERRIDE
position or LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch is in REMOTE position and remote contacts are open.
LOCAL position and CCN control is enabled (Stop state) or CCN is enabled (Stop state) with LOR switch in REMOTE position and remote contacts closed.
switch is in LOCAL position.
CCN is disabled or LOR switch is in REMOTE position with contacts closed and CCN is disabled.
LOCAL position and CCN is enabled (Run state) or LOR switch is in REMOTE position with con­tacts closed and CCN is enabled (Run state).
pied override function. LOR switch is in LOCAL position.
Dual set point is in effect. In this mode, unit contin­ues to run in an occupied condition, and leaving fluid set point is automatically controlled to the CSP1 set point in the SET POINT function.
Dual set point is in effect. In this mode, unit contin­ues to run in unoccupied condition, but leaving fluid set point is automatically increased to a higher level (CSP2 set point is in SET POINT function).
Temperature reset is in effect. In this mode, unit is using temperature reset to adjust leaving fluid set point upward, and unit is currently controlling to the modified set point. The set point can be modi­fied based on re turn flu id, outdoor -air temp erat ure, space temperature, or 4 to 20 mA signal.*
Demand limit is in effect. This indicates that capacity of unit is being limited by demand limit control option. Because of this limitation, the unit may not be able to produce the desired leaving fluid temperature. Demand limit can be controlled by a switch or 4 to 20 mA signal.*
Flotronic™ System Manager (FSM) is controlling the chiller.
Ramp load (pulldown) limiting is in effect. In this mode, the rate at which leaving fluid temperature is dropped is limited to a predetermined value to prevent compressor overloading. See CRAMP set point in the SET POINT function (page 27). The pulldown limit can be modified, if desired, to any rate from 0.2° F to 2° F (0.1° to 1° C)/minute.
Timed override is in effect. This is a 1 to 4 hour temporary override of the programmed sche dul e, forcing unit to occupied mode. Override can be implemented with unit und er LOCA L/ R EMOTE or CCN control. Override expires after each use.
Water System Manager is controlling the chiller.
Slow change override is in effect. The leaving fluid temperature is close to and moving towards the control point.
CODE DESCRIPTION
OFF TO ON DELA Y ACTIVE
LOAD LIMIT ACTIVE
2 CHILLR LEAD LAG ACTIVE
2 CHILLR LL COMM FAILURE
CIRCUIT A LOW DISCHARGE SUPERHT
CIRCUIT B LOW DISCHARGE SUPERHT
CIRCUIT A HIGH SCT
CIRCUIT B HIGH SCT
LOW COOLER SUCTION TEMPERATURE
Chiller is being held off by Minutes Off Time found by keying . Also, normal operation of the chiller
includes a minimum 1.5 minute delay after a capacity stage change has been made. This delay is adjustable from 1.5 to 6 minutes.
This function determines the maximum allowable capacity that can be running and is accomplished through the Flotronic System Manager. The unit may not be able to produce the desired leaving fluid temperature.
This mode indicates that Master and Slave chillers have been configured and are operating using the Dual Chiller control. This is a series water flow arrangement where chilled fluid is piped to the Slave Chiller first and then through the Master Chiller. Leaving Fluid Temperature control is performed based on Master Chiller Leaving Fluid Temperature.
This mode indicates that communication has been lost between the Master and Slave chillers. Both chillers will return to a stand-alone mode of operation until communication is restored.
If the discharge superheat is less than 5° F (2.8° C) and falling, a circuit loader will be deenergized every 30 seconds. The final stage will not be unloaded unless an alarm condition is present.
See description for Circuit A above.
If the circuit is running and the Saturated Condensing Temperature (SCT) is greater than the Maximum Condensing Temperature Set point (MCT_SP) minus 12° F (6.7° C), the control will not add any stages.
If the SCT is greater than the MCT_SP plus 5° F (2.8° C), the circuit will be unloaded and shut down if necessary. If the SCT is greater than the MCT_SP plus 2° F (1.1° C) for one minute, a loader will be deenergized.
If the SCT is greater than the MCT_SP minus 4° F (2.2° C), the control will compare the maximum operatin g pressure set point (MOP_SP) with the modi­fied MOP_SP (MOP_CTRL).
If the MOP_CTRL is greater than the MOP_SP, the mode will be cleared. Otherwise the control will display the high SCT override mode. The capacity control routine will not add any stages. If the circuit is at its lowest capacity, this mode will be ignored.
See description for Circuit A above.
Circuit A and/or B low saturated suction condition exists. Control will not increase capacity on affected circuits. The EXV of the affected circuit(s) will be opened until the condition does not exist.
CCN — Carrier Control Network CSP — Cooling Set Point CRAMP — Cooling Ramp Loading EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve LOR — Local/Off/Remote SP —Set Point WSM — Water System Manager
*A field-supplied 500 Ohm 1/
the input terminals when using a 4 to 20 mA signal.
LEGEND
W resistor must be installed across
2
Table 16 — Reading Current Operating Mode
KEYP AD ENTR Y DISPL AY
MODES :MODE_TBL CCN ON
DEMAND LIMIT ACTIVE
26
Page 27
TEST FUNCTION — The test function operates the diagnos-
ENTER
tic program. To initiate the test function, the LOCAL/OFF/ REMOTE switch must be in the OFF position.
To reach a particular test, press its subfunction number fol­lowed by the key then scroll to the desired test by pressing the down arrow key. Refer to Ta ble 17 for a complete descrip­tion of the test function.
To start a test of discrete outputs, press . To end the test, simply press the key or press . Pressing
ENTER
ENTER
the key after a test has started advances the system to the next test, whether the current test is operating or has timed out. Circuit A discrete outputs can be tested in and in­clude loaders, minimum load valve, oil heater (if equipped), motor cooling solenoids, oil pump, and oil solenoi ds. Similarly, Circuit B discrete outputs can be tested in . Additional discrete outputs, including condenser fans, cooler heater, water pumps, and remote alarms can be tested in .
®
Press to access Valves and Motormaster
control analog outputs. Scroll down to display Circuit A EXV Valve with a target percent of 0%. Press to step the EXV to 25%. Pressing three additional times will move the
ENTER
ENTER
EXV to 50%, 75%, and 100% The EXV may be closed in 25% steps by pressing for each desired step. Wait 30 sec-
ENTER
onds between each step when opening and closing for the valve to stop moving. Pressing the down arrow will display Circuit B EXV Valve and it is tested in the same manner as Circuit A. Also available for test are Circuit A water valve (if equipped) and the Circuit A and B Fan speed % (direct control Motor­master device) outputs for 30GX chillers. These are tested in the same manner as the EXV valves. Note that condenser fan motors are NOT started during fan speed quick tests. Measure 4 to 20 mA dc output using meter in series with violet wire to controller. See pages 74 and 75 of Field W iring section.
While the unit is in test, you can leave the test function and access another display or function by pressing the appropriate keys. However, a component that is operating when another function is accessed remains operating. You must re-enter the test function and press to shut down the component.
ENTER
Components with a timed operating limit time out normally even if another function is accessed.
Since the Test function checks only certain outputs, it is a good practice to also check all inputs and outputs accessible through the Status function. These can be located by pressing
through . If keypad is not used for 10 minutes, the unit automa tically l eave s the tes t functi on and res umes t he normal rotating display . See Table 18.
HISTORY FUNCTION — Pressing displays total machine operating hours. Scroll down to display machine run time and starts, and total run time and starts for each compres­sor. Refer to Table 19 for a complete description of the func­tion. When the PSIO-1 module is replaced or downloaded with Version 4.0 or later software, the number of starts and run hours may be changed one time. Record the current values from the PSIO before removing the module or downloading new software. The number of starts and hours may be changed
by entering the desired value at the HSIO and pressing the
key.
Pressing displays the last 10 alarms along with a description and time and date of occurrence of each alarm.
SET POINT FUNCTION — Set points are entered through the keypad. Set points can be changed within the upper and lower limits, which are fixed. The ranges are listed below. Refer to Tabl e 20 for a complete description of the function.
Cooling Set Point 1 and 2
Water:
38 to 70 F
(3.3 to 21.1 C)
Medium
T emp erature Brine:
14 to 70 F
(–10 to 21.1 C)
Temperature Brine:
Low
–13 to 70 F
(–25 to 21.1 C)
Reset Set Points
Maximum
Reset Range:
–30 to 30 F
(–17 to 17 C)
External Signal Reset: 4 to 20 mA (2 to 10 vdc with
External
T emp erature Reset:
–40 to 240 F
(–40 to 118 C)
500 Ohm
1
/2 watt resistor)
Chiller Fluid ∆:
0° to 15 F
(0° to 8 C)
Demand Limit Set Points Switch Input: Step 1 — 0 to 100% Capacity Reduction
Step 2 — 0 to 100% Capacity Reduction
External Signal: Maximum Demand Limit 4 to 20 mA
(2 to 10 vdc with 500 Ohm Minimum Demand Limit 4 to 20 mA (2 to 10 vdc with 500 Ohm
1
/2 watt resistor)
1
/2 watt resistor) Loadshed Demand Delta: 0 to 60% Maximum Loadshed Time: 0 to 120 min.
Head Pressure Set Points Air cooled chillers (30GX): 80 to 135 F (26.7 to 57.2 C) W ater cooled chill ers (30HX): 80 to 128 F (26.7 to 53.3 C) Set Point Table
— The unit operating set points can be found under . Use the down arrow key to scroll through the set points. The first set point is Cool Set Point 1. This is the oc­cupied chilled fluid set point. Scroll down to Cool Set Point 2 and then to the Cooling Ramp load multiplier which is config­urable from 0.2 to 2.0° F/min. (0.11 to 1.1° C/min.). This value is the maximum rate at which the leaving fluid temperature is allowed to drop without adding a stage. Cooling Set Point 2 is used in conjunction with the dual set point switch function. This is used as the low temperature set point for ice duty or as the unoccupied set point. Press the down arrow key to display the Circuit A and B head pressure set points. The remaining set points in this subfunction include demand limit, LCW (leaving chilled water) delta alarm limit, minutes off time, and motor temperature set point.
Display Units
— Press to display the units of mea-
sure being used. Type 0 is for Engli sh and type 1 is for Metric. Address
— For CCN configurations, press and scroll
down to display the address and bus number of the chiller.
— Press and scroll down to read and change the
Time unit day of week, time, day of month, m onth of year a nd year of century . See the examples in Table 20 for making changes to these value s.
27
Page 28
Table 17 — Test Function and Subfunction Directory
SUBFUNCTION KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY COMMENT
1 Circuit A Discrete Outputs
2 Circuit B Discrete Outputs
Circuit A Discrete Output Loader A1 Relay is OFF
Loader A1
ENTER
Relay is ON Loader A2
Minimum Load Valve A Circuit A Oil Heater A1 Mtr. Cooling Solenoid A2 Mtr. Cooling Solenoid Circuit A Oil Pump Oil Solenoid A1 Oil Solenoid A2
Circuit B Discrete Output Loader B1 Relay is OFF
Loader B1
ENTER
Relay is ON Loader B2
Minimum Load Valve B
Similarly, use to test remaining outputs. Press the down arrow key or to turn an output off.
NOTE: Output will display Rela y is ABSENT when not configured
Similarly, use to test remaining outputs. Press the down arrow key or to turn an
output off.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
3 Unit Discrete Outputs
Circuit B Oil Heater B1 Mtr. Cooling Solenoid B2 Mtr. Cooling Solenoid Circuit B Oil Pump Oil Solenoid B1 Oil Solenoid B2
NOTE: Output will display Rela y is ABSENT when not configured
Unit Discrete Output Fan 1 Relay is OFF
Fan 1
ENTER
Relay is ON Fan 2
Similarly, use to test remaining outputs.
ENTER
Press the down arrow key or to turn an
Fan 3
output off.
Fan 4 Fan 5 Energizes Circuit A fans for 30HXA units. Fan 6 Energizes Circuit B fans for 30HXA units. Cooler Pump
ENTER
Condenser Pump Cooler Heater Alarm Remote Alarm 1 Currently not supported.
28
Page 29
Table 17 — Test Function and Subfunction Directory (cont)
SUBFUNCTION KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLA Y COMMENT
3 Unit Discrete Outputs (cont)
4 Valves and Motormaster
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
Remote Alarm 2 Currently not supported. Remote Alarm 3 Currently not supported.
Remote Alarm 4 Currently not supported. Remote Alarm 5 Currently not supported. Remote Alarm 6 Currently not supported. Remote Alarm 7 Currently not supported. Remote Alarm 8 Currently not supported. Remote Alarm 9 Currently not supported. Remote Alarm 10 Currently not supported. Remote Alarm 11 Currently not supported. Remote Alarm 12 Currently not supported. Remote Alarm 13 Currently not supported. Remote Alarm 14 Currently not supported. Remote Alarm 15 Currently not supported. Remote Alarm 16 Currently not supported.
Valves and Motor Master Circuit A EXV Valve Target Percent = 0% Circuit A EXV Valve
Step in 25% increments.
Target Percent = 25% Circuit A EXV Valve
Target Percent = 50% Circuit A EXV Valve
Target Percent = 75%
Wait 30 seconds between each step for valv e to stop moving.
Valve may be closed in 25% increments by key­ing in . Wait 30 seconds between
ENTER
each step for valve to stop moving. Circuit A EXV Valve Target Percent = 100%
Circuit B EXV Valve Target Percent = 0%
Circuit A Water Valv e Target Percent = 0%
Test same method as for Circuit A.
Test same method as for EXV valves. Circuit A% Fan Speed Test same method as for EXV valves.
EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve
LEGEND
KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY RESPONSE COMMENTS
ENTER
ENTER
EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve
ENTER
ENTER
LEGEND
Circuit A Discrete Output Loader A1 Relay is OFF Loader A1 Relay is ON
Loader A1 Relay is OFF
Valves and Motor Master Circuit A EXV Valve Target Percent = 0% Circuit A EXV Valve Target Percent = 25%
Circuit A EXV Valve Target Percent = 0
Circuit B% Fan Speed Test same method as for EXV valves.
Table 18 — Using Test Function
Appears on screen momentarily, then will switch to Loader A1.
Compressor Loader A1 solenoid energized Compressor Loader A1 solenoid deenergized
Continue pressing to step to 50%, 75%, and 100%. Wait 30 seconds between each step for valve to stop moving. Continue pressing to step closed.
29
ENTER
ENTER
Page 30
Table 19 — History Function and Subfunction Directory
SUBFUNCTION KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY COMMENT
1 Operating Hours
Machine Operating Hours xxx.x hours
Machine St arts xxx
Circuit A
Number of hours unit has at least 1 compres­sor running
Number of unit starts from zero capacity
2 Alarm History
Operating Hours xxx.x hours
Compressor A1 Hours xxx.x hours
Compressor A2 Hours xxx.x hours
Starts Compressor A1 Starts
xxx Compressor A2 Starts
xxx Circuit B
Compressor B1 Hours xxx.x hours
Compressor B2 Hours xxx.x hours
Starts Compressor B1 Starts
xxx Compressor B2 Starts
xxx Previous Alarm 1 - description
Alarm description, time/day of occurrence
Previous Alarm 2 - description Alarm description, time/day of occurrence
Previous Alarm 3 - description Alarm description, time/day of occurrence
Previous Alarm 4 - description Alarm description, time/day of occurrence
Previous Alarm 5 - description Alarm description, time/day of occurrence
Previous Alarm 6 - description Alarm description, time/day of occurrence
Previous Alarm 7 - description Alarm description, time/day of occurrence
Previous Alarm 8 - description Alarm description, time/day of occurrence
Previous Alarm 9 - description Alarm description, time/day of occurrence
Previous Alarm 10 - description Alarm description, time/day of occurrence
These values may be changed once, when new software is downloaded or when the PSIO-1 module is replaced (Version 4.0 and later)
List 10 most recent alarms. Use when necessary.
30
Page 31
Table 20 — Set Point Function and Subfunction Directory
SUBFUNCTION KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY COMMENT
1 Set Point Table
COOLING Cool Setpoint 1
Default: 44.0
x.xx dF Cool Setpoint 2
xx.x dF Cooling Ramp Loading
Default: 44.0
Default: 0.5
xx.x dF HEATING NOT SUPPORTED
Heat Setpoint 1 xx.x dF
Heat Setpoint 2 xx.x dF
Heating Ramp Loading xx.x dF
NOT SUPPORTED Default: 98.0
NOT SUPPORTED Default: 98.0
NOT SUPPORTED Default: 0.5
HEAD PRESSURE
2 Units
3 Address
4 Time
5 CCN Disable
CCN — Carrier Comfort Network dF — Degrees Fahrenheit LCW — Leaving Chilled Water
LEGEND
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
Head Pressure Setpoint A xxx.x dF
Head Pressure Setpoint B xxx.x dF
DEMAND LIMIT Demand Switch 1 Setpoint
xxx.x% Demand Switch 2 Setpoint
xxx.x% LCW Delta Alarm Limit
xxx.x dF Minutes Off Time
xxx min Motor Temp Set Point
xxx.x dF US IMPERIAL/METRIC
0 TARGET ADDRESS
x TARGET BUS NUMBER
x Day of Week
Monday Day of Week
Wednsday TIME (HOUR/MIN)
00:00 TIME (HOUR/MIN)
10:30 DAY OF MONTH
xx DAY OF MONTH
20 MONTH OF YEAR
xx MONTH OF YEAR
05 YEAR OF CENTURY
xx YEAR OF CENTURY
96 Disable CCN Control
x
Default: 113.0 (GX)
100.0 (HXA) 85.0 (HXC) Default: 113.0 (GX)
100.0 (HXA) 85.0 (HXC)
Default: 80.0%
Default: 50.0%
Default: 50.0 dF
Default: 0 min
Default: 200.0 dF
0 = English (Default) 1 = Metric
Default: 1
Default: 0
Mon=1, Tues=2, etc.
Day of week set
Enter mil itary format
Time of day set
Day of month set
Month of year set
Year of century set
0=no, 1=yes Default: 0
NOTE: If metric option is selected under , temperatures are expressed in degrees Celsius and pressures are expressed in kPa.
31
Page 32
CCN Enable/Disable
— Press to disable the CCN control of the chiller. This function will override CCN control commands. The CCN Enable value under must be ON to activate thi s funct ion. With CCN Ena ble se t to ON and Disable CCN Control set to “0,” the chiller will function nor­mally under CCN control. With Disable CCN Control set to “1,” the chiller will operate in a local mode under its own control.
Reading and Changing Set Points
— Table 21 shows how to read and change the chilled fluid set point. Other set points can be changed by following the same procedure. Refer to Table 20 for the sequence of display of set points in each subfunction.
Table 21 — Reading and Changing
Chilled Fluid Set Point
KEYPAD DISPLAY COMMENTS
COOLING Change set point from Cool Setpoint 1
44.0 F default Cool Setpoint 1
ENTER
48.0 F
default to 48 F.
Set point change complete
SERVICE FUNCTION — This function allows the techni­cian to view and input configuration data. Factory configura­tion data, field configuration data, and service configuration data may be viewed or entered through the keypad and display module. See Table 22 for a complete listing of configurable items. Whenever a processor module is replaced in the field, the complete list of configuration codes should be checked for correct settings. The current software version can be displayed. See Tabl e 23.
Scroll down in this function to display configuration infor­mation including number of compressors, tonnage, and com­pressor must-trip amps.
Password Protection of HSIO Configurable Service Points — To modify configurations and values and to use the
manual control subfunction, the password must be entered be­fore the first change can be made. The default password is set to . See Table 24 for an example of how to en­ter the password to change the Lead/Lag configuration.
Options Configuration Tables 1 and 2
— These subfunc­tions can be accessed by pressing or and scroll­ing down to display the configuration options. See Table 22 for a complete list of these options.
Temperature Reset, Demand Limit and Head Pressure PID Configurations — Press and scroll down to view the configuration information. See T able 22 for a complete list.
Factory Configuration Codes
— Pressing allows entry into the factory and service configuration codes subfunc­tion. Under this subfunction, there are 5 configuration codes that are downloaded at the factory. Each code is made up of 8 digits. If the processor module is replaced in the field, these 5 configuration codes should be checked using the keypad and HSIO display module. See Table 25 for a description of the factory configuration codes (codes 1 through 3) and service configuration codes (codes 4 and 5).
The factory and service configuration codes are found by pressing . These are preset from the factory. They can be verified by following the description in Table 23. These codes MUST be checked and corrected in the field if the PSIO-1 module is replaced.
NOTE: The LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch must be in the OFF position to change configuration codes.
A label is applied to a control box panel with a list of factory and service codes for particular units. Table 26 shows how to configure a new PSIO-1 module for use in a 30HXC106---530CA water cooled chiller.
Transducer Calibration
— Press and scroll down to view the transducer calibration information. See Table 22 for a complete list, and the Pressure Transducers section on page 61 for a description of this subfunction.
Manual Control Mode
— This control allows the user to have full control over the compressors, loaders, and the minimum load valve (if installed) of the machine. Normal safeties su ch as high pressure, oil level and pressure, and CPM related alarms are NOT bypassed in this control mode. The capacity control function and overrides ARE bypassed when using the manual control mode. To enter this mode, switch the LOR switch to OFF. Press at the HSIO . The display will read Manual Control Enable - Disable. Press and
ENTER
switch the LOR switch to Local. The display will change to Manual Control Enable - Enable. The Disable and Enable will appear on the second line of the display. See Table 22 for a complete list of this func tion.
Scroll down and press to start the desired com-
ENTER
pressor. The control will start the compressor if the pre-lube cy­cle is passed, just as in normal operation. Press to add loaders as desired and press to turn off loaders and
ENTER
ENTER
compressors. The Minimum Load Valve can be energized us­ing the same procedure.
Dual Chiller Configuration
— Press to enter the Dual Chiller control configuration. This method of control is for a stand-alone Master/Slave combination of chillers and wil l NOT work with the Flotronic™ System Manager (FSM) or Chillervisor™ System Manager (CSM). The Minus One Pass Cooler option is required for this configuration.
The chillers should be piped for series flow through the coolers. The Master chiller must be downstream from the Slave chiller leaving water. Both the Master and Slave chiller must be connected to the same CCN Level II communications bus with different addresses. To enable the dual chiller configuration the CCN Enable function must be set to Enable for each chiller, otherwise each chiller will operate independently. This value can be activated through the HSIO or through a CCN de­vice. Both chillers should be configured for Close Control
and require flow switches to be installed. For cooler pump control, wire both Master and Slave chiller outputs to the cooler pump starter. All system inputs (temperature reset, de­mand limit, dual set point, etc.) should be connected to the Master chiller. If Lead/Lag Balance is disabled, the Master chiller will always be the lead chiller. If Lead/Lag Balance is enabled, the control will alternate between the Master and Slave chillers to keep their respective run hours balanced with­in the value configured for Lead/Lag Balance Delta. The de­sired leaving fluid set point for the Duplex chiller must be configured in the Master chiller. CCN Control of the chillers can be disabled locally through the HSIO by entering
and enabling the Disable CCN Control value. This value must be disabled before the chiller will return to Duplex control.
32
Page 33
Table 22 — Service Function and Subfunction Directory
SUBFUNCTION KEYPAD ENT RY DISPLAY COMMENT
1 Service Configuration
2 Options Configuration 1
3 Options Configuration 2
See Legend on page 36.
Software CESR_500100 Ver xxx
Unit Type x
Number of Cir A Comp x
Compressor A1 Tonnage xx
Compressor A2 Tonnage xx
Cap. High Temp Override x
Number of Cir B Comp x
Compressor B1 Tonnage xx
Compressor B2 Tonnage xx
Max. Cond. Temp Setpoint xxx.x dF
MOP Setpoint xx.x dF
Fan Staging Select x
CPM Board Used? Yes
Compr. A1 Must Trip Amps xxx.x
Compr. A2 Must Trip Amps xxx.x
Compr. B1 Must Trip Amps xxx.x
Compr. B2 Must Trip Amps xxx.x
Cooler Fluid Selec t x
Min. Load Valve Select x
Loading Sequence Select x
Lead/Lag Sequence Selectx1 = Automatic (Default), 2 = Circuit A leads,
Head Press. Control Type x
Motormaster Select x
Water Valve Type x
Ext. Reset Sensor Select x
Cooler Pump Interlock x
Cooler Pump Control x
Condenser Pump Control x
Condenser Flow Switch x
Condenser Water Sensorsx0 = Not used (Default)
Heat Reclaim Sensors x
Cooling Setpoint Select x
Heating Se tpoint Select x
1 = Air-cooled (30GX), 2 = Water-cooled (30HXC) 3 = Split system (30HXA)
30GX = 154 F (68 C) 30HXA = 152 F (67 C) 30HXC = 122 F (50 C)
Default = 52 F (11.1 C)
Displays “Not Used” or a number. See Table 7 (30GX only).
Value from CPM module. See Appendix A.
Value from CPM module. See Appendix A.
Value from CPM module. See Appendix A.
Value from CPM module. See Appendix A.
1 = Water (Default), 2 = Medium Temp Brine 3 = Low Temp Brine (HX only)
Displays Enable/Dsable Default: Dsable
1 = Equal circuit, 2 = Staged circuit Default: 2. See page 7.
3 = Circuit B leads 0 = None (Default, HX), 1 = Air cooled (Default, for GX and must be set to 1 for
HXA control of remote A/C condenser fans), 2 = Water cooled (HXC only) 0 = None (Default), 1 = Direct control
0 = None (Default), 1 = 4-20 mA, 2 = 2-10 V 3 = 20-4 mA, 4 = 10-2 V
0 = Space Temp Thermistor (Default) 1 = Outside Air Themistor
0 = No interlock 1 = Interlock enabled (Default)
0 = Not controlled (Default) 1 = On/Off control
0 = Not controlled (Default, and 30HXA control of remote A/C condenser fans) 1 = On/Off control 2 = Off when stages equal 0 (unit off)
Displays Enable/Dsable Default: Dsable
1 = Used CURRENTLY NOT SUPPORTED
0 = Single set point (Default), 1 = Dual set point (switch controlled), 2 = Dual set point (clock controlled)
0 = Single set point (Default), 1 = Dual set point (switch controlled), 2 = Dual set point (clock controlled) CURRENTLY NOT SUPPORTED
33
Page 34
Table 22 — Service Function and Subfunction Directory (cont)
SUBFUNCTION KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY COMME NT
3 Options Configuration 2 (cont) Ramp Load Select
4 Reset Configuration Table
x Clock Control Select
x
Ice Configuration Select x
OAT Sensor Select x
Remote Alarm Select x
Alarm Reset Select x
Close Control Select x
Deadband Multiplier x.x
Current Unbalance Alarm x
COOLING RESET TYPE 1
Degrees Reset at 20 mA xx.x dF
COOLING RESET TYPE 2
Remote temp=No Reset xx.x dF
Remote temp=Full Reset xx.x dF
Degrees Reset xx.x dF
COOLING RESET TYPE 3
CHW Delta T=No Reset xx.x dF
CHW Delta T=Full Reset xx.x dF
Degrees Reset xx.x dF
COOLING RESET
0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled (Default) See page 9.
0 = No clock control (Default) 1 = Local clock control 65 = CCN Clock Control
0 = Disabled (Default) 1 = Clock Control 2 = Demand Limit Control
0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Default: 0
0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Default: 0
0 = Not selected, 1 = Selected (Default, allows use of LOR switch to reset alarms)
0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Default: 0 See page 7.
Default: 1.0
Alarm at 10% imbalance; 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Default: 1
See Temperature Reset section, page 41.
Default: 0
Default: 20
Default: 125
Default: 0
Default: 15
Default: 0
Default: 0
Select/Enable Reset Type x
HEATING RESET TYPE 1
Degrees Reset at 20 mA xx.x dF
HEATING RESET TYPE 2
Remote temp=No Reset xx.x dF
Remote temp=Full Reset xx.x dF
Degrees Reset xx.x dF
HEATING RESET TYPE 3
HTW Delta T=No Reset xx.x dF
HTW Delta T=Full Reset xx.x dF
Degrees Reset xx.x dF
HEATING RESET
Select/Enable Reset Type x
DEMAND LIMIT See Demand Limit Section, page 41.
Demand Limit at 20 mA xxx.x%
0 = No Reset (Default), 1 = 4-20 mA Reset 2 = External Reset, 3 = Return Fluid Reset
CURRENTLY NOT SUPPORTED
Default: 0
CURRENTLY NOT SUPPORTED
Default: 125
Default: 20
Default: 0
CURRENTLY NOT SUPPORTED
Default: 15
Default: 0
Default: 0
0 = No Reset (Default), 1 = 4-20 mA reset 2 = External reset, 3 = Return Fluid reset
Enter 0-100, Default: 0%
34
Page 35
Table 22 — Service Function and Subfunction Directory (cont)
SUBFUNCTION KEYPA D E N TRY DIS P L AY COMMENT
4 Reset Configuration Table (cont) Demand Limit Select
x Loadshed Group Number
x Loadshed Demand Delta
xxx% Maximum Loadshed Time
xx min WATER VALVE PID
0 = None (Default), 1 = Two-step switch, 2 = 4-20 mA, 3 = CCN Loadshed
0-99, Default: 0
0-60%, Default: 0
0-120 min, Default: 60 min
5 Factory Configuration Codes
6 NOT USED
7 Transducer Calibration
Proportional PID Gain x.x
Integral PID Gain x.x
Derivative PID Gain x.x
AIR MOTO R MASTER PID
Proportional PID Gain x.x
Integral PID Gain x.x
Derivative PID Gain x.x
FACTORY CODES
Configuration Code 1 xxxxxxxx
Configuration Code 2 xxxxxxxx
Configuration Code 3 xxxxxxxx
SERVICE CODES
Configuration Code 4 xxxxxxxx
Configuration Code 5 xxxxxxxx
CALIBRATION OFFSET See Pressure Transducer Calibration, page 61.
CIRCUIT A PRESSURE
Default = 1.0 Adjustable from -20.0 to 20.0
Default = 0.1 Adjustable from -20.0 to 20.0
Default = 0.0 Adjustable from -20.0 to 20.0
Default = 1.0 Adjustable from -20.0 to 20.0
Default = 0.1 Adjustable from -20.0 to 20.0
Default = 0.0 Adjustable from -20.0 to 20.0
Factory set. See Table 25.
Factory set. See Table 25.
Factory set. See Table 25.
Factory set. See Table 25.
Factory set. See Table 25.
See Legend on page 36.
Discharge Pressure xxx.x PSI
Suction Pressure xxx.x PSI
A1 Oil Pressure xxx.x PSI
A2 Oil Pressure xxx.x PSI
Economizer Pressure xxx.x PSI
CALIBRATION OFFSET
CIRCUIT B PRESSURE
Discharge Pressure xxx.x PSI
Suction Pressure xxx.x PSI
B1 Oil Pressure xxx.x PSI
B2 Oil Pressure xxx.x PSI
Economizer Pressure xxx.x PSI
35
Page 36
Table 22 — Service Function and Subfunction Directory (cont)
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
SUBFUNCTION KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY COMME NT
7 Transducer Calibration (cont) Calibrate All at 0 PSIG
8 Manual Control Table
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
9 Dual Chiller Configuration (Series Water Flow Only)
No Last Calibration Date
mmm-dd-yy Manual Control Enable
Dsable Password Protected
Enter: Manual Control Enable
ENTER
Dsable Manual Control Enable
Enable Circuit A Compressor 1
Off
LOR switch should be in OFF position
Will be displayed if not entered earlier in HSIO use
Manual control must be disabled to resume normal capacity control
Switch LOR switch to Local before proceeding
Circuit A Compressor 1OnProvided no alarms exist, control will attempt circuit start within 2 minutes.
Press to stop circuit.
Circuit A Compressor 2 Off to enable,
ENTER
to stop
Circuit A Loader 1 Off
to enable, to stop
Circuit A Loader 2 Off to enable,
to stop
Circuit A Min Load Valve Off
to enable, to stop
Circuit B Compressor 1 Off
to enable, to stop
Circuit B Compressor 2 Off to enable,
to stop
Circuit B Loader 1 Off
to enable, to stop
Circuit B Loader 2 Off
to enable, to stop
Circuit B Min Load Valve Off to enable,
to stop
MST_SLV
Master/Slave Select 0/1/2
Slave Address 0
Lead/Lag Balance 0/1
Lead/Lag Balance Delta xxx hours
0 = Disabled 1 = Master 2 = Slave
Default = 0 Adjustable from 0-236
0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled
Default = 168 Adjustable from 40-400
CCN — Carrier Control Network CHW — Chilled Water CPM — Compressor Protection Module dF — Degrees Fahrenheit HSIO — Standard Keypad HTW — Hot Water LOR — Local/Off/Remote MOP — Maximum Operating Pressure OAT — Outside Air Temperature PID — Proportional Integral Derivative
LEGEND
36
Page 37
Table 23 — Display Current Software Version
ENTER
FUNCTION
Software Version
KEYPAD
ENTRY
DISPLAY COMMENT
Software CESR_500100 Ver xxx
Carrier Software Part Number, where xxx is the revision number.
Table 24 — Compressor Lead/Lag Configuration
SUB-FUNCTION Options
Configurat ion 1
NOTE: Configurations may be mod i fied after entering the password. The password is only r equ ire d to be entered once. After a period of 10 minutes of no HSIO activity, the user is automatically logged out and the control requires that the password be entered on the next use.
KEYPAD
ENTRY
ENTER
ENTER
DISPLAY
Cooler Fluid Select 1
Min. Load Valve Select Dsable
Loading Sequence Select 1
Lead/Lag Sequence Select 1
PASSWD PROTECT ED FUNC Enter password:
Lead/Lag Sequence Select 0
Lead/Lag Sequence Select 2
37
Page 38
Table 25 — Factory and Service Configuration Code Values
UNIT MODEL NUMBER CONF. CODE 1* CONF. CODE 2* CONF. CODE 3* CONF. CODE 4* CONF . CODE 5*
30GX080 11460010 13900000 00000170 15400521 12000093 30GX090, 105 11560010 13900000 00000180 15400521 12000093 30GX106 11560010 13900000 00000180 15400521 14000095 30GX115 11660010 13900000 00000190 15400521 14000095 30GX125 11660010 14600000 00000161 15400521 14000095 30GX136 11660010 15600000 00000162 15400521 16000097 30GX150 11560010 18000000 00000095 15400521 16000097 30GX151 11800010 15600000 00000176 15400521 07000088 30GX160 11660010 18000000 00000105 15400521 16000097 30GX161 11800010 16600000 00000177 15400521 07000088 30GX175 11800010 18000000 00000119 15400521 07000088 30GX176 11800010 18000000 00000119 15400521 03000084 30GX205 12663910 18000000 00000145 15400521 07000088 30GX206 12803910 16600000 00000217 15400521 09000090 30GX225 12804610 18000000 00000166 15400521 07000088 30GX226 12804610 18000000 00000166 15400521 09000090 30GX250 12806610 18000000 00000186 15400521 09000090 30GX251 12808010 16600000 00000258 15400521 05000086 30GX265 12808010 18000000 00000200 15400521 05000086 30GX281 12804610 28046000 00000240 15400521 05000086 30GX301 12805610 28056000 00000251 15400521 05000086 30GX325 12806610 28066000 00000262 15400521 05000086 30GX350 12808010 28080000 00000218 15400521 05000086 30HXA076 31390010 13900000 00000183 15200521 02000063 30HXA086 31460010 13900000 00000190 15200521 02000063 30HXA096 31560010 13900000 00000200 15200521 02000063 30HXA106 31660010 13900000 00000210 15200521 02000063 30HXA116 31660010 14600000 00000181 15200521 02000063 30HXA126 31660010 15600000 00000182 15200521 02000063 30HXA136 31800010 15600000 00000196 15200521 02000063 30HXA146 31800010 16600000 00000197 15200521 02000063 30HXA161 31800010 15600000 00000196 15200521 02000063 30HXA171 31660010 18000000 00000125 15200521 02000063 30HXA186 31800010 18000000 00000139 15200521 02000063 30HXA206 32663910 18000000 00000165 15200521 02000063 30HXA246 32805610 18000000 00000196 15200521 02000063 30HXA261 32806610 18000000 00000206 15200521 02000063 30HXA271 32808010 18000000 00000220 15200521 02000063 30HXC076 21390010 13900000 00000173 12200521 00000058 30HXC086 21460010 13900000 00000180 12200521 00000058 30HXC096 21560010 13900000 00000190 12200521 00000058 30HXC106 21660010 13900000 00000200 12200521 00000058 30HXC116 21660010 14600000 00000171 12200521 00000058 30HXC126 21660010 15600000 00000172 12200521 00000058 30HXC136 21800010 15600000 00000186 12200521 00000058 30HXC146 21800010 16600000 00000187 12200521 00000058 30HXC161 21800010 15600000 00000186 12200521 00000058 30HXC171 21660010 18000000 00000115 12200521 00000058 30HXC186 21800010 18000000 00000129 12200521 00000058 30HXC206 22663910 18000000 00000155 12200521 00000058 30HXC246 22805610 18000000 00000186 12200521 00000058 30HXC261 22806610 18000000 00000196 12200521 00000058 30HXC271 22808010 18000000 00000210 12200521 00000058
*Unit Type will be listed as air cooled, water cooled, or remote split system. Unit type is first digit in Configuration Code
1 and is 1 for 30GX units, 2 for 30HXC units, and 3 for 30HXA cooling only chillers. For other options, see Table 22 under the Service subfunction. A label listing configuration codes is located on the control box door or panel.
38
Page 39
Table 26 — Entering Configuration Codes
KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY RESPONSE
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
FA C T ORY CODES
Configuration Code 1 00000000
Configuration Code 1 21660010
Configuration Code 2 00000000
Configuration Code 2 13900000
Configuration Code 3 00000000
Configuration Code 3 00000200
SERVICE CODES
Configuration Code 4 00000000
Configuration Code 4 12200521
Configuration Code 5 00000000
Configuration Code 5 00000058
SCHEDULE FUNCTION — This function provides a means to automatically switch the chille r from an occupied mod e to an unoccupied mode. Refer to Table 27 for a complete descrip­tion of the function.
The schedules consist of 8 user-configurable occupied time periods. The control supports time schedules for local control, remote control and ice building. These time periods can be flagged to be in effect or not in effect on each day of the week. The day begins at 00.00 and ends at 24.00. The machine is in unoccupied mode unless a scheduled time period is in effect. If an occupied period is to extend past midnight, it must be pro­grammed in the following manner: occupied period must end at 24:00 hours (midnight); a new occupied period must be pro­grammed to begin at 00:00 hours.
NOTE: This is true only if the occupied period starts at 00:00 (midnight). If the occupied period starts at a time other than midnight, then the occupied period must end at 24:00 hours (midnight) and new occupied period must be programmed to start at 00:00 in order for the chiller to stay in the occupied mode past midnight. Each time schedule can be overridden to
keep the chiller in an Occupied mode for 1, 2, 3 or 4 hours on a one-time basis.
Dual Set Point Control
— This feature can be enabled to allow the use of a second or unoccupied cooling set point. The function can be either switch controlled or clock controlled. To enable switch control, set the Cooling Setpoint Select under
to 1. See page 74 or 75 of Field Wiring section, depending on unit type, for switch input wiring to the PSIO-2 module. Configure Cool Setpoint 2 under to the desired value. The unit will then control leaving water temper­ature to Cool Setpoint 2 when the switch input is closed. To enable clock control, set the Cooling Setpoint Select under
to 2. Set Cool Setpoint 2 to the desired unoccupied value. Using , configure local operating schedules for the desired occupied and unoccupied time periods. The unit will then control leaving water temperature to Cool Setpoint 2 during unoccupied time periods.
39
Page 40
Table 27 — Schedule Function and Subfunction Directory
SUBFUNCTION KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY COMMENT
1 Ice Build Schedule*
2 Local Schedule†
3 Remote Schedule (Currently Not Used)
4 Holiday Configuration**
5-33 Holiday Configuration
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
through
SCHEDULES: OCCPC01S Timed Override: 00
SCHEDULES: OCCPC01S Timed Override: 02
MTWTFSSH OCC UNOCC 01- 00000000 00:00 00:00
MTWTFSSH OCC UNOCC 01- 11111000 00:00 00:00
MTWTFSSH OCC UNOCC 01-11111000 21:00 00:00
MTWTFSSH OCC UNOCC 01-11111000 21:00 06:30
MTWTFSSH OCC UNOCC 02- 00000000 00:00 00:00
SCHEDULES: OCCPC02S Timed Override: 00
MTWTFSSH OCC UNOCC 01- 00000000 00:00 00:00
MTWTFSSH OCC UNOCC 01- 11111000 00:00 00:00
MTWTFSSH OCC UNOCC 01-11111000 06:30 00:00
MTWTFSSH OCC UNOCC 01-11111000 06:30 21:00
MTWTFSSH OCC UNOCC 02- 00000000 00:00 00:00
SCHEDULES: OCCPC65S Timed Override: 00
MTWTFSSH OCC UNOCC 01- 00000000 00:00 00:00
MTWTFSSH OCC UNOCC 01- 11111000 00:00 00:00
MTWTFSSH OCC UNOCC 01-11111000 06:30 00:00
MTWTFSSH OCC UNOCC 01-11111000 06:30 21:00
MTWTFSSH OCC UNOCC 02- 00000000 00:00 00:00
HOLIDAYS: HOLDY_01 Starts on 00/00 00 days
HOLIDAYS: HOLDY_01 Starts on 12/23 00 days
HOLIDAYS: HOLDY_01 Starts on 12/23 10 days
HOLIDAYS: HOLDY_02 Starts on 00/00 00 days
Extended Occupied Time
Two hour override entered
Displays current stored schedule (First two numbers are schedule, 01-08)
Monday-Friday now occupied
Occupied time now set
Unoccupied time now set Ice Build schedule completed
Can enter up to 7 additional ice build schedules
Extended Occupied Time
Displays current stored schedule (First two numbers are schedule, 01-08)
Monday-Friday now occupied
Occupied time now set
Unoccupied time now set Local schedule completed
Can enter up to 7 additional local schedules
Extended Occupied Time
Displays current stored schedule (First two numbers are schedule, 01-08)
Monday-Friday now occupied
Occupied time now set
Unoccupied time now set Remote schedule completed
Can enter up to 7 additional remote schedules
Can configure holiday start day and duration
Start of hol i day set
Holiday duration set
Allows configuration of 29 additional holiday periods
*Ice configuration select must be set to 1 for clock control. The ice configuration can be accessed by pressing and scrolling down.
†Clock control select must be set to 1 for clock control. The clock control can be accessed by pressing and scrolling down. **The BROADCAST function (BRODEFS table) must be activated (change to “YES” and download) when using the Remote Enhanced Display controller, Building
Supervisor or ComfortWorks® software for the control to recognize holidays.
40
Page 41
Temperature Reset —
The control system is capable of providing leaving fluid temperature reset based on return fluid temperature. Because the temperature difference between leav­ing and return temperature is a measure of the building load, return fluid temperature reset is essentially an average building load reset method.
Under normal operation, the chiller maintains a constant leav­ing fluid temperature approximately equal to the chilled fluid set point. As building load drops from 100% down to 0%, entering cooler fluid temperature drops in proportion to load. Thus, the temperature drop across the cooler drops from a typi­cal 10° F (5.5° C) at full load to a theoretical 0° F (0° C) at no load. See Fig. 8.
At partial load, leaving chilled fluid temperature may be lower than required. If this is allowed to increase (reset), the ef­ficiency of the chiller increases. Amount of reset can be de­fined as a function of cooler temperature drop. This is a simple linear function that requires 3 pieces of input data for the set function that will vary depending on measurement method used. See the following sections and Table 28.
NOTE: Reset set points are not accessible unless the reset function is enabled first. The Control Point will be recalculated taking into account the set point plus the amount of reset. This is done as a field configuration. Select one of the 3 choices for type of reset: Return Fluid Reset, External Temperature Reset, or 4 to 20 mA Signal Reset. See Table 28.
If dual set point control is enabled, the amount of reset is ap­plied to whichever set point is in effect at the time.
T ables 29-31 demonstrate how to activate reset. EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE RESET — In this example,
the unit set point is reset from full load at 90 F (32 C ) to a max­imum reset value of 10° F (5.5° C) at 25 F (–6.7 C) outdoor ambient. This me ans that if the chilled fluid set point is 4 4 F (6.7 C), there is no reset if the temperature is 90 F (32 C). At a temperature of 25 F (–6.7 C), the chilled fluid set point would be reset to 54 F (12.2 C). See Fig. 8 and Table 29. A field-sup­plied outdoor air thermistor must be connected to PSIO-2 as shown on page 74 or 75 of Field Wiring.
To activate this function for space te mperature reset leave both the External Reset Sensor Select and the OAT Sensor Se­lect at 0, and change the Select/Enable Reset T ype to 2, follow­ing the procedure in T able 29.
EXTERNALLY POWERED RESET (4 to 20 mA) — In this example, the uni t set point is rese t from full lo ad at 4 mA to a maximum reset value of 10° F (5.5° C) at 20 mA. See Fig. 9 and Ta ble 30.
RETURN FLUID TEMPERATURE RESET — In this exam­ple, the unit set point i s reset from full load based on the chil led fluid return temperature. The example us es a reset val ue of 10 degrees at full reset. Full reset is at a 2-degree temperature dif­ference across the cooler and no reset would be at a 10 ° F dif­ference across the cooler. See Fig. 10 and Table 31.
Demand Limit —
Demand Limit is a feature that allo ws the unit capacity to be limited during periods of peak energy usage. There are 3 types of demand limiting which can be con­figured. The first type is through 2 switch inputs, which will reduce the maximum capacity to 2 user-configurable percent­ages. The second type is by a 4 to 20 mA signal input which will reduce the maximum capacity linearly between 100% at a 4 mA input signal (no reduction) down to the user­configurable level at a 20 mA input signal. The third type uses the CCN Loadshed module and has the ability to limit the cur­rent operating capacity to maximum and further reduce the capacity if required.
T o use Demand Limit, sele ct the type of demand limit ing to use. Then configure the Demand Limit set points based on the type selected.
DEMAND LIMIT (Switch Controlled, 30GX only) — In this example, demand limit by switch control will be configured and the switch set points will be set at 75% and 40%. Capacity steps are controlled by 2 relay switch inputs field wired to PSIO-2, terminal 28 for switch 1 and terminal 25 for switch 2. See Tabl e 32.
For Demand Limit by switch control, closing the first stage demand limit contact will put the unit on t he first demand limi t level. The unit will not exceed the percentage of capacity en­tered as Demand Switch 1 set point. Closing contacts on the second demand limit switch prevents the unit from exceeding the capacity entered as Demand Switch 2 set point. The de­mand limit stage that is set to the lowest demand takes priority if both demand limit inputs are closed. If the demand limit p er­centage does not match unit staging, the unit will limi t capacity to the closest capacity stage.
T o Disable Demand Limit: Enter as shown in Ta­ble 32. Scroll down to Demand Limit Select and press
ENTER
to select no Demand Limit control.
Table 28 — Temperature Reset Set Point Limits
INPUT DAT A DESCRIPT ION
Maximum Reset Amount — Allowable range for maxi mu m amount when LWT set point is reset.
Maximum Reset Amount — Temperature at which maximum res et o ccur s.
Minimum Reset Reference — Temperature at which no reset occurs.
CHW — Chilled Water OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature LWT — Leaving Fluid Temperature
LEGEND
(With 500-Ohm resistor) Variable Limits Variable Limits Variable Limits
Degrees Reset at 20 mA
Type 1 — 4-20 mA
(–30 to 30 F) –34 to –1 C
— — Remote temp =
— — Remote temp =
Type 2 — OAT/Occupied Space
(External Sensor)
Degrees Reset (–30 to 30 F)
Full reset
No reset
41
MEASUREMENT METHOD
–34 to –1 C
(20 to 125 F) –7 to 52 C
(20 to 125 F) –7 to 52 C
Type 3 — Return Fluid
Degrees Reset (–30 to 30 F)
CHW Delta T = Full Reset
CHW Delta T = No Reset
–34 to –1 C
(0 to 15 degrees F) 0 to 8° C cooler temperature rise
(0 to 15 degrees F) 0 to 8° C cooler temperature rise
Page 42
6.7 (12)
5.5 (10)
4.4 (8)
3.3 (6)
2.2 (4)
RESET AMOUNT C (F)
1.1 (2)
0.0 (0)
-18 (0) -12 (10) -7 (20) -1 (30) 4 (40) 10 (50) 16 (60) RESET REFERENCE TEMPERATURE-OUTDOOR AIR OR SPACE TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR C (F)
BUILDING LOAD
RESET AMOUNT
Fig. 8 — Cooling External Temperature Reset
6.7 (12)
5.5 (10)
4.4 (8)
21 (70) 27 (80)
32 (90)
38(100)
100
80
60
40
20
PERCENT BUILDING LOAD
0
3.3 (6)
2.2 (4)
RESET AMOUNT C (F)
1.1 (2)
6.7 (12)
5.5 (10)
4.4 (8)
3.3 (6)
RESET AMOUNT C (F)
2.2 (4)
0 (0)
0 (0)
2 (1)
4 (2)
6 (3)
RESET REFERENCE = 4-20 mA SIGNAL INPUT (VOLTS DC)
8 (4)
10 (5)
12 (6)
14 (7)
Fig. 9 — 4 to 20 mA Cooling Temperature Reset
RESET AMOUNT
16 (8)
18 (9)
20 (10)
100
80
60
40
1.1 (2)
0.0 (0)
0.0 (0) 0.5 (1) 1.1 (2) 1.6 (3) 2.2 (4) 2.7 (5) 3.3 (6) 3.8 (7) 4.4 (8) RESET REFERENCE TEMPERATURE = COOLER DELTA T (COOLER EWT - LWT) C (F)
Fig. 10 — Cooling Return Water Reset
BUILDING LOAD
42
5.0 (9)
5.5 (10)
20
PERCENT OF BUILDING LOAD
0
Page 43
Table 29 — Setting External Temperature Reset Table 30 — Setting External Powered Reset
KEYPAD
ENTRY
ENTER
ENTER
DISPLAY
RESPONSE
Cooler Fluid Select 1
Min. Load Valve Select Disable
Loading Sequence Select 1
Lead/Lag Sequence Select 1
Head Press. Control Type 0
Motormaster Select 0
Water Valve Type 0
Ext. Reset Sensor Select 0
Ext. Reset Sensor Select1Outdoor Ambient sensor
Cooling Setpoint Select 0
Heating Setpoint Select 0
Ramp Load Select 0
Clock Control Select 1
Ice Configuration Select 0
OAT Sensor Select 0
OAT Sensor Select 1
COOLING RESET TYPE 1
Degrees Reset at 20 mA
0.0 dF COOLING RESET TYPE
2 Remote temp = Full Reset
20.0 dF Remote temp = Full Reset
ENTER
25.0 dF Remote temp = No Reset
125.0 dF Remote temp = No Reset
ENTER
90.0 dF Degrees Reset
0.0 dF Degrees Reset
ENTER
10.0 dF
COMMENT
selected for reset
OAT sensor enabled
COOLING RESET Scroll down to this point
KEYPAD
ENTRY
ENTER
DISPLAY
RESPONSE
COOLING RESET TYPE 1
Degrees Reset at 20 mA
0.0 dF Degrees Reset at 20 mA
10.0 dF COOLING RESET Scroll down to this point
Select/Enable Reset T ype 0
ENTER
Select/Enable Reset T ype14-20 mA reset selected
Table 31 — Setting Return Fluid
Temperature Reset
KEYPAD
ENTRY
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
DISPLAY
RESPONSE
COOLING RESET TYPE 1
COOLING RESET TYPE3Scroll down to this point
CHW Delta T = No Reset
15.0 dF CHW Delta T = No Reset
10.0 dF CHW Delta T = Full Reset
0.0 dF CHW Delta T = Full Reset
2.0 dF Degrees Reset
0.0 dF Degrees Reset
10.0 dF COOLING RESET
Select/Enable Reset Type 0
Select/Enable Reset Type3Return Fluid reset selected
COMMENT
COMMENT
Select/Enable Reset Type 0
ENTER
Select/Enable Reset Type2External reset selected
43
Page 44
EXTERNALLY POWERED DEMAND LIMIT (4 to 20 mA Controlled) — In this example, the 4 to 20 mA Demand Limit will be configured and the 20 mA demand limit percentage will be set to 50%. See T able 33 and Fig. 1 1.
DEMAND LIMIT (CCN Loadshed Controlled) — In this example, the CCN Loadshed Demand Limit will be config­ured. The loadshed group will be set to 1, demand delta will be set to 40% and the maximum loadshed time will be set to 90 minutes. See T able 34.
The Loadshed Group number is established by the CCN system designer. The PIC (product integrated control) will respond to a Redline command from the Loadshed control. When the Redline command is received, the current stage of capacity is set to the maximum stages available. Should the loadshed control send a Loadshed command, the PIC will reduce the current stages by the value entered for Loadshed Demand delta. For the above example the Loadshed Demand delta is 40%. If the chiller is operating at 80% of total capacity when a Redline command is rece ived, the maximum ava ilabl e capacity is set to 8 0%. When a Loadshe d comma nd is rece ived, the chiller capacity will be reduced by 40%. The chiller can now operate at a total capacity of no more than 48% [80% – (80% x 40%)] until a Cancel Redline or Cancel Load­shed command is received. The control will disable the Redline/Loadshed command if no Cancel command has been received within the configured maximum loadshed time limit.
Table 32 — Setting Switch-Controlled
Demand Limit
KEYPAD
ENTRY
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
DISPLAY
RESPONSE
COOLING RESET TYPE 1
DEMAND LIMIT Scroll down to this point
Demand Limit at 20 mA
0.0% Demand Limit Select
0 Demand Limit Select
1 COOLING
DEMAND LIMIT Scroll down to this point
Demand Switch 1 Setpoint
80.0% Demand Switch 1 Setpoint
75.0% Demand Switch 2 Setpoint
50.0% Demand Switch 2 Setpoint
40.0%
COMMENT
T w o step s witch configured
Configuration complete
Table 33 — Setting Demand Limit
(4 to 20 mA Controlled;
2 to 10 vdc With 500-Ohm Resistor)
KEYPAD
ENTRY
ENTER
ENTER
DISPLAY
RESPONSE
COOLING RESET TYPE 1
DEMAND LIMIT Scroll down to this point
Demand Limit at 20 mA
0.0% Demand Limit at 20 mA
50.0% Demand Limit Select
0 Demand Limit Select24-20 mA control configured
Table 34 — Setting Demand Limit
(CCN Loadshed Controlled)
KEYPAD
ENTRY
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
DISPLAY
RESPONSE
COOLING RESET TYPE 1
DEMAND LIMIT Scroll down to this point
Demand Limit at 20 mA
0.0% Demand Limit Select
0 Demand Limit Select
3 Loadshed Group Number
0 Loadshed Group Number
1 Loadshed Demand Delta
0 Loadshed Demand Delta
40% Maximum Loadshed Time
60 min Maximum Loadshed Time
90 min
CCN Loadshed control configured
Configuration complete
COMMENT
COMMENT
100
80
60
100% CAPACITY AT 4 mA
40
20
MAX. ALLOWABLE LOAD (%)
0
0
2
4
Fig. 11 — 4 to 20 mA Demand Limiting
75% CAPACITY AT 12 mA
6
DEMAND LIMIT SIGNAL (4-20 mA INPUT)
8
10
12
44
50% CAPACITY AT 20 mA
14
16 18
20
Page 45
TROUBLESHOOTING
The 30GX,HX screw chiller control has many features to aid in troubleshooting. By using the keypad and display mod­ule and the Status function, operating conditions of the chiller are displayed while the unit is running. The Test function allows for operational checkout of compressor loaders, fans, EXVs, solenoids, and other components while the chiller is stopped. The Service function displays how configurable items are configured and provides a manual control mode where the compressors can be started and loaded. If an operating fault is detected, an alarm is generated and an alarm code is displayed under the subfunction along with an explanation of the fault. Up to 10 current alarm codes are stored under this subfunction. For checking specific items, see T abl e 14.
Checking Display Codes —
machine has been programmed to operate, check the diagnostic information displayed in the Status function and the configura­tion information displayed in the Service function.
Unit Shutoff —
To shut the unit off, move the LOCAL/ OFF/REMOTE switch to OF F position. All compres sors and solenoids stop immediately.
Complete Unit Stoppage —
can be caused by any of the following conditions:
• cooling load satisfied
• remote on/off contacts open
• programm ed schedule
• emergency stop command from CCN
• general power failure
• blown fuse in control power feed disconnect
• open control circuit fuse(s)
• LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch moved to OFF position
• freeze protection trip
• low flow protection trip
• open contacts in chilled water flow switch (optional)
• Open contacts in any auxiliary interlock. Terminals that
are jumpered from factory are in series with control switch. Opening the circuit between these terminals places unit in Stop mode, similar to moving the control switch to OFF position. Unit cannot start if these contacts are open. If they open while unit is running, the unit stops
• cooler entering or leaving fluid thermistor failure
• low/high transducer supply voltag e
• loss of communications between processor module and
other control modules
• low refrigerant pressure
• off-to-on delay is in effect
If a stoppage occurs more than once as a result of any of the above safety devices, determine and correct the cause before attempting another restart.
Single Circuit Stoppage —
can be caused by the following:
• low oil pressure
• open contacts in high pressure switch
• low refrigerant pressure
• thermistor failure
• transducer failure
• alarm condition from CPM module
Stoppage of one circuit by a safety device action does not affect other circuit. When a safety device trips, the circuit is shut down immediately and EXV closes.
To determine how the
Complete unit stoppage
Single circuit stoppage
If a stoppage occurs more than once as a result of any of the preceding safety devices, determine and correct the cause before attempting another restart.
Restart Procedure —
After the cause for stoppage has been corrected, restart is either automatic or manual, depending on the fault. Manual reset requires that the alarm(s) be reset via the HSIO. Press and then to clear manual
ENTER
reset alarms. If the Alarm Reset Select feature is selected ( ), a manual reset alarm can also be reset by switching the LOR switch from LOCAL/REMOTE to OFF and back to LOCAL/REMOTE again. If an alarm was from the CPM mod­ule, depress the reset button located on the control/fuse panel for 5 seconds before clearing the alarm through the HSIO. Some typical fault conditions are described in Table 35. For a complete list of fault conditions, codes, and reset type, see Table 36.
POWER FAILURE EXTERNAL TO THE UNIT — Unit restarts automatically when power is restored.
Table 35 — Typical Stoppage Faults
and Reset Types
STOPPAGE FAULT RESET TYPE
Loss of Co nd en se r F l o w ( 3 0HX C ) Manual reset Cooler Freeze Protection (Chilled Fluid, Low Temperature) Cooler Fluid Pump Interlock Automatic reset (Manual for closed
Control Circuit Fuse Blown Unit restarts automatically when power High-Pressure Switch Open Manual reset
Low Sat. Suction Temperature Manual reset Low Oil Pressure Manual reset Loss of Communications with
WSM or FSM Controller
FSM — Flotronic™ System Manager WSM — Water System Manager
LEGEND
Alarms and Alerts —
Auto reset first time, manual if repeated in same day
contacts when pump is off) is restored
Automatic reset
These are warnings of abnormal or fault conditions, and may cause either one circuit (alert) or the whole unit (alarm) to shut down. They are assigned code numbers as described in Table 36. The alarm descriptions are displayed on the HSIO when the subfunction is en­tered. When a communication loss occurs to a hardware point, an alert or alarm may be generated. Refer to Table 37. The PSIO also recognizes illegal configurations. Illegal configura­tions are shown in Table 38.
When an alarm or alert is activated, the relay K3 (for 30GX units) or K6 (for 30HX units) will close. See Field Wiring sec­tion on page 70 for wiring details.
Table 36 contains a detailed description of each alarm and alert code error and possible cause.
ALARM/ALERT RESET — Automatic alarms will reset without operator intervention if the condition corrects itself. One or more of the following methods must be used to reset manual alarms:
To reset PSIO alarms, first find and correct the cause of the alarm. Then from the HSIO press and to
ENTER
clear the alarm. If the Alarm R eset Select in is s et to “1,” the default value, the LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE switch can be switched from “Local” or “REMOTE” to “OFF” for 5 sec­onds and back to its original position to reset the alarm.
45
Page 46
Compressor Protection Module (CPM) alarms, 1.xx, 2.xx,
5.xx, or 6.xx require additional steps to reset these alarms. To clear these alarms, first find and correct the cause of the alarm. Then press and hold the Reset Button located on the CPM board for 5 seconds. This action will reset only the alarmed cir­cuit, and clear the CPM. Next, reset the alarm in the PS IO as described above. For CPM alarms, 1.95, 2.95, 5.95 and 6.95, first correct the configuration header problem, turn LOCAL-
hold the reset button on the unit’s control/fuse panel for 5 sec­onds. This action removes power to the CPM, and should not be used while another compressor is in operation. Next, reset the alarm in the PSIO as described above.
Compressor Alarm/Alert Circuit —
sor is controlled by a CPM processor, which controls the com­pressor operation. Power is supplied to the CPM logic circuit.
OFF-REMOTE switch to the “OFF ” position, then press and
Table 36 — Alarm and Alert Codes
ALARM/ALERT
CODE
0 —
1.xx
2.xx
5.xx
6.xx
CPM SUBCODES
(xx)
x.0 —No Error — — — — x.1 Alarm High Pressure Switch
x.2 Alarm No Motor Current CPM reads less than
x.25* Alarm Current Imbalance
x.27* Alert Current Imbalance
x.3 Alarm Current Imbalance
x.35 Alarm Single Phase Current
x.4 Alarm High Motor Current CPM detects high cur-
x.5 Alarm Ground Fault CPM detects ground
x.75 Alarm Contactor Failure CPM detects min. 10%
x.8 Alarm Current Phase
x.85 Alarm Motor Over
x.9 Alarm Open Thermistor CPM detects open cir-
x.95 Alarm Config. Header Fault CPM finds error with
x.10 Alarm Shorted Thermistor CPM detects short
ALARM OR
ALERT
See CPM subcodes below
See CPM subcodes below
See CPM subcodes below
See CPM subcodes below
DESCRIPTION
No Alarms or Alerts
Exist
Compressor A1 Failure
Compressor A2 Failure
Compressor B1 Failure
Compressor A2 Failure
Trip
>10% (Alarm)
>10% (Warning)
>25%
Loss
Reversal
Temperature
WHY WAS THIS
ALARM GENERATED?
——— —
See CPM subcodes below
See CPM subcodes below
See CPM subcodes below
See CPM subcodes below
HPS input to CPM mod­ule open
10% of MTA on all legs for >3 seconds
CPM measures current imbalance between phases greater than 10% for 25 minutes
CPM measures current imbalance between phases greater than 10% for 25 minutes
CPM measures current imbalance between phases greater than 25% for 25 minutes
CPM measures current imbalance between phases greater than 50% (running current < 50% of MTA) or 30% (running current > of MTA) for 1 second
rent compared to MTA setting
current (4.5 ± 2.0 amps)
of MTA for 10 seconds after shutting off com­pressor contactor. Oil solenoid is energized.
CPM detects phase reversal from toroid reading or from incom­ing power supply
CPM detects high motor temperature
cuit in motor temp themistor
MTA value punched out in header
circuit in motor temp thermistor
50%
ACTION TAKEN
BY CONTROL
See CPM subcodes below
See CPM subcodes below
See CPM subcodes below
See CPM subcodes below
Comp. shut down Manual/Button Loss of condenser air/ water
Comp. shut down Manual/Button Power supply disconnected,
Circuit shut down Manual/Button Loose terminals on power
None — Loose terminals on power
Circuit shut down Manual/Button Loose terminals on power
Circuit shut down Manual/Button Blown fuse, wiring error, loose
Comp. shut down Manual/Button Operation beyond chiller
Comp. shut down Manual/Button Motor winding(s) gone to
All remaining com­pressors shut down. All loaders deener­gized. Min. load valve of affected cir­cuit energized (if equipped)
Circuit shut down Manual/Button Terminal block power supply
Comp. shut down Manual/Button Motor cooling (all) or Econo-
Comp. shut down Manual/Button Wiring error or faulty ther-
Comp. shut down Manual/Button Header pins on CPM board
Comp. shut down Manual/Button Wiring error or faulty
RESET METHOD
Manual See CPM subcodes Manual See CPM subcodes Manual See CPM subcodes Manual See CPM subcodes
Manual/Button Faulty contactor, contactor
below below below below
flow. Operation beyond chiller capability. Liquid valve not open.
blown fuse(s), wiring error, contactor not energized, faulty current toroid, check toroid wiring
wires. Poor power supply. Dis­played only if current unbal­ance alarm feature is enabled
in
wires. Poor power supply. Dis­played only if current unbal­ance alarm feature is disabled
in
wires. Poor power supply.
terminals
capability, improperly punched configuration header, blown fuse
ground, wiring error, loose plug connector.
welded, wiring error.
leads not in correct phase. Toroid wire harness crossed. Check compressor contactor.
mizer (2 comp. circuits) sole­noid failure, low refrigerant charge.
mistor†
either all or none punched out, header not fully sealed in CPM board.
thermistor†
Each compres-
PROBABLE
CAUSE
46
Page 47
ALARM/ALERT
CODE
7 Alert Cir. A Discharge Gas
8 Alert Cir. B Discharge Gas
9 Alarm Cooler Leaving Fluid
10 Alarm Cooler Entering Fluid
11 Alert Condenser Leaving
12 Alert Condenser Entering
15 Aler t Compressor A1 High
16 Aler t Compressor A2 High
17 Aler t Compressor B1 High
18 Aler t Compressor B2 High
21 Alert External Reset Temper-
22 Alert Circuit A Discharge
23 Alert Circuit B Discharge
24 Alert Circuit A Suction
25 Alert Circuit B Suction
26 Alert Comp A1 Oil Pressure
27 Alert Comp A2 Oil Pressure
28 Alert Comp B1 Oil Pressure
29 Alert Comp B2 Oil Pressure
30 Alert Circuit A Economizer
ALARM OR
ALERT
DESCRIPTION
Thermistor Failure
Thermistor Failure
Thermistor Failure
Thermistor Failure
Fluid Thermistor Failu re
Fluid Thermistor Failu re
Motor Temperature
Motor Temperature
Motor Temperature
Motor Temperature
ature Thermistor Failure
Pressure Transducer Failure
Pressure Transducer Failure
Pressure Transducer Failure
Pressure Transducer Failure
Transducer Failure
Transducer Failure
Transducer Failure
Transducer Failure
Transducer Failure
Table 36 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)
WHY WAS THIS
ALARM GENERATED?
Thermistor outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C) or DGT > 210 F (98.9 C)
Thermistor outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C) or DGT > 210 F (98.9 C)
Thermistor outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)
Thermistor outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)
Thermistor outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)
Thermistor outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)
Thermistor outside range of –39.9 to 245 F (–39.9 to 118 C) for 5 consecutive readings
Thermistor outside range of –39.9 to 245 F (–39.9 to 118 C) for 5 consecutive readings
Thermistor outside range of –39.9 to 245 F (–39.9 to 118 C) for 5 consecutive readings
Thermistor outside range of –39.9 to 245 F (–39.9 to 118 C) for 5 consecutive readings
Thermistor outside range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118 C)
Calibration offset more than 6 PSIG (41 kPa) or Voltage ratio (volts read/ ref. voltage) more than
99.9% or less than 0.5% Calibration offset more
than 6 PSIG (41 kPa) or Voltage ratio (volts read/ ref. voltage) more than
99.9% or less than 0.5% Calibration offset more
than 6 PSIG (41 kPa) or Voltage ratio (volts read/ ref. voltage) more than
99.9% or less than 0.5% Calibration offset more
than 6 PSIG (41 kPa) or Voltage ratio (volts read/ ref. voltage) more than
99.9% or less than 0.5% Calibration offset more
than 6 PSIG (41 kPa) or Voltage ratio (volts read/ ref. voltage) more than
99.9% or less than 0.5% Calibration offset more
than 6 PSIG (41 kPa) or Voltage ratio (volts read/ ref. voltage) more than
99.9% or less than 0.5% Calibration offset more
than 6 PSIG (41 kPa) or Voltage ratio (volts read/ ref. voltage) more than
99.9% or less than 0.5% Calibration offset more
than 6 PSIG (41 kPa) or Voltage ratio (volts read/ ref. voltage) more than
99.9% or less than 0.5% Calibration offset more
than 6 PSIG (41 kPa) or Voltage ratio (volts read/ ref. voltage) more than
99.9% or less than 0.5%
ACTION TAKEN
BY CONTROL
Circuit A shut down Manual Thermistor failure, motor
Circuit B shut down Manual Thermistor failure, motor
Chiller shut down Automatic Thermistor failure, dam-
Uses 0.1° F/% Total Capacity as rise/ton
None. Chiller continues to run.
None. Chiller continues to run.
Compressor A1 shut down
Compressor A2 shut down
Compressor B1 shut down
Compressor B2 shut down
Reset disabled. Runs under normal co ntrol/ set points.
Circuit A shut down Automatic Transducer failure,
Circuit B shut down Automatic Transducer failure,
Circuit A shut down Automatic Transducer failure,
Circuit B shut down Automatic Transducer failure,
Comp A1 shut down Automatic Transducer failure,
Comp A2 shut down Automatic Transducer failure,
Comp B1 shut down Automatic Transducer failure,
Comp B2 shut down Automatic Transducer failure,
Circuit A shut down Automatic Transducer failure,
RESET METHOD
Automatic Thermistor failure, dam-
Automatic Thermistor failure, dam-
Automatic Thermistor failure, dam-
Manual Thermistor failure, motor
Manual Thermistor failure, motor
Manual Thermistor failure, motor
Manual Thermistor failure, motor
Automatic Thermistor failure or wir-
PROBABLE
CAUSE
cooling solenoid failure or wiring error.
cooling solenoid failure or wiring error.
aged cable/wire or wir­ing error.
aged cable/wire or wir­ing error.
aged cable/wire or wir­ing error.
aged cable/wire or wir­ing error.
cooling (all), or Econo­mizer (2 comp. circuits) solenoid failure.
cooling (all), or Econo­mizer (2 comp. circuits) solenoid failure.
cooling (all), or Econo­mizer (2 comp. circuits) solenoid failure.
cooling (all), or Econo­mizer (2 comp. circuits) solenoid failure.
ing error.
power supply failure, or wiring damage/error.
power supply failure, or wiring damage/error.
power supply failure, or wiring damage/error.
power supply failure, or wiring damage/error.
power supply failure, or wiring damage/error.
power supply failure, or wiring damage/error.
power supply failure, or wiring damage/error.
power supply failure, or wiring damage/error.
power supply failure, or wiring damage/error.
47
Page 48
ALARM/ALERT
CODE
31 Alert Circuit B Economizer
32 Alarm Transducer Supply Out-
34 Alert 4-20 mA Reset Input Out
35 Alert 4-20 mA Demand Limit
36 Alarm Loss of Communication
37 Alert Circuit A Low
38 Alert Circuit B Low
40 Alert Compressor A1 Low Oil
41 Alert Compressor A2 Low Oil
42 Alert Compressor B1 Low Oil
43 Alert Compressor B2 Low Oil
44 Alarm Circuit A Condenser
45 Alarm Circuit B Condenser
46 Alarm Cooler Freeze
ALARM OR
ALERT
DESCRIPTION
Transducer Failure
side 4.5 to 5.5 Volts
of Range
Input Out of Range
with “Hardware Point”
Saturated Suction Temperature
Saturated Suction Temperature
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
Freeze Protection (alarm ignored for brine chillers)
Freeze Protection (alarm ignored for brine chillers)
Protection
Table 36 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)
WHY WAS THIS
ALARM GENERATED?
Calibration offset more than 6 PSIG (41 kPa) or Voltage ratio (volts read/ ref. voltage) more than
99.9% or less than 0.5% Reference voltage mea-
sured at PSIO-1, J7­34,35 less than 4.5 V or greater than 5.5 V.
If configured and input signal to PSIO-2, J7-19,20(HX), J7-22,23(GX) less than 2 mA or greater than 20mA
If configured and input signal to PSIO-2, J7-22,23(HX), J7-13,14(GX) less than 2 mA or greater than 20mA
PSIO-1 has lost commu­nication with one of the points in Table 37.
SST reads 6 F (3.3 C) or more below the brine freeze point for 3 min­utes. For brines, SST may also be 14 F (7.8 C) or more below the low est cooling set point.
SST reads 6 F (3.3 C) or more below the brine freeze point for 3 min­utes. For brines, SST may also be 14 F (7.8 C) or more below the low est cooling set point.
See Note 1. Comp A1 shut down Manual Low Water Temperature,
See Note 1. Comp A2 shut down Manual Low Water Temperature,
See Note 1. Comp B1 shut down Manual Low Water Temperature,
See Note 1. Comp B2 shut down Manual Low Water Temperature,
For W/C chillers only, if SCT < 34 F (1.1 C)
For W/C chillers only, if SCT < 34 F (1.1 C)
Cooler EW T or LWT less than freeze point. Freeze point is 34 F (1.1 C) for water, cooling set point minus 8 F (4.4 C) for brines.
ACTION T AKEN
BY CONTROL
Circuit B shut down Automatic Transducer failure, power
Chiller shut down Automatic Power supply failure or
Reset function disabled. Normal set point used
Demand limit ignored. Runs under normal con­trol based on 100% demand limit.
See Table 37. Automatic Failed module, wiring
Circuit A shut down Manual Low refrigerant charge,
Circuit B shut down Manual Low refrigerant charge,
Chiller shut down. Turn Cond. pump On if Chiller is Off
Chiller shut down. Turn Cond. pump On if Chiller is Off
Chiller shut down. Leave Cooler pump on. T urn Cooler pump On if Chiller is Off.
RESET METHOD
Automatic Faulty signal generator,
Automatic Faulty signal generator,
Automatic Failed/bad discharge
Automatic Failed/bad discharge
Automatic** Faulty thermistor, lo w
PROBABLE
CAUSE
supply failure, or wiring damage/error.
wiring error. Low trans­former voltage.
wiring error, 500 ohm resistor missing or not properly installed.
wiring error, 500 ohm resistor missing or not properly installed.
error, failed transformer, loose connection plug, wrong address
plugged strainer, faulty expansion valve. Low water flow.
plugged strainer, faulty expansion valve. Low water flow.
low refrigerant charge, plugged oil filter, closed oil valve, bad oil solenoid, compressor oil check valve stuck, oil line check valve stuck, plugged oil strainer
low refrigerant charge, plugged oil filter, closed oil valve, bad oil solenoid, compressor oil check valve stuck, oil line check valve stuck, plugged oil strainer
low refrigerant charge, plugged oil filter, closed oil valve, bad oil solenoid, compressor oil check valve stuck, oil line check valve stuck, plugged oil strainer
low refrigerant charge, plugged oil filter, closed oil valve, bad oil solenoid, compressor oil check valve stuck, oi l line ch ec k valve stuck, plugged oil strainer
pressure transducer, refrigerant leak, configured for water­cooled condenser
pressure transducer, refrigerant leak, configured for water­cooled condenser
water flow
48
Page 49
Table 36 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)
ALARM/ALERT
CODE
47 Alert Circuit A High
48 Alert Circuit B High
49 Alarm Loss of Condenser
50 Alarm Illegal Configuration x Illegal Configuration has
51 Alarm Initial Configuration
52 Alarm Unit is in Emergency
53 Alarm Cooler Pump Interlock
54 Alarm Cooler Pump Interlock
55 Alarm Cooler Pump Interlock
56 Alert Loss of Communication
57 Alert Circuit A Liquid Level
58 Alert Circuit B Liquid Level
59 Alarm Compressor A1
60 Alarm Compressor A2
61 Alarm Compressor B1
62 Alarm Compressor A2
63 Alarm Circuit A&B OFF for
64 Alert Circuit A Loss of Charge Discharge pressure
65 Alert Circuit B Loss of Charge Discharge pressure
66 Alarm Loss of Communication
67 Alert Circuit A High
68 Alert Circuit B High
70 Alert High Leaving Chilled
ALARM OR
ALERT
DESCRIPTION
Saturated Suction Temperature
Saturated Suction Temperature
Flow
Required
Stop
Failed at Start-Up
Opened Unexpectedly
Closed When Pump OFF
with WSM
Sensor Failure
Sensor Failure
Pre-Start Oil Pressure
Pre-Start Oil Pressure
Pre-Start Oil Pressure
Pre-Start Oil Pressure
Alerts. Unit down
with FSM
Discharge Pressure
Discharge Pressure
Water Temperature
WHY WAS THIS
ALARM GENERATED?
After first 90 seconds, SST > 55 F (12.8 C) and EXV < 1% for 5 minutes
After first 90 seconds, SST > 55 F (12.8 C) and EXV < 1% for 5 minutes
Flow switch not closed within 1 minute after pump is started or if flow switch opens during nor­mal operation for > 10 seconds
been entered. Correction needed.
No configuration has been entered.
CCN command received to shut unit down.
Interlock did not close within 1 minute after transition
Interlock opened for at least 5 seconds during operation
Interlock closed when pump relay is off
No communications have been received by PSIO-1 within 5 minutes of trans­mission.
Sensor reads 245 F (118 C) or -40 F (-40 C) with SST > 9 F (-12.8 C)
Sensor reads 245 F (118 C) or -40 F (-40 C) with SST > 9 F (-12.8 C)
Oil Pump did not build sufficient pressure during pre-lube cycle.
Oil Pump did not build sufficient pressure during pre-lube cycle.
Oil Pump did not build sufficient pressure during pre-lube cycle.
Oil Pump did not build sufficient pressure during pre-lube cycle.
Control has shut down both circuits due to alerts.
reading < 10 PSIG for 30 seconds
reading < 10 PSIG for 30 seconds
No communications have been received by PSIO-1 within 5 minutes of last transmission.
SCT > MCT_SP + 5 F (2.8 C)
SCT > MCT_SP + 5 F (2.8 C)
LCW read > LCW Delta Alarm limit and total capacity is 100% and current LCW > LCW reading 1 minute ago
ACTION TAKEN
BY CONTROL
Circuit A shut down Manual Faulty expansion valv e ,
Circuit B shut down Manual Faulty expansion valv e ,
Chiller shut down Manual Low condenser water
Chiller cannot start. See T ab le 38.
Chiller cannot start Manual Configuration omitted.
Chiller shut down CCN/Automatic Network command
Chiller shut down. Pump turned off.
Chiller shut down. Pump turned off.
Cooler pump remains off. Unit prevented from starting.
WSM forces removed. Runs under own control.
Runs, but controls EXV based on D i s ch. S u pe r ­heat
Runs, but controls EXV based on D i s ch. S u pe r ­heat
Circuit cannot start Manual Low oil, oil pump failure,
Circuit cannot start Manual Low oil, oil pump failure,
Circuit cannot start Manual Low oil, oil pump failure,
Circuit cannot start Manual Low oil, oil pump failure,
None Automatic Check individual alarms
Circuit A shut down Manual Refrigerant leak or
Circuit B shut down Manual
FSM forces removed Runs under own control
Circuit shut down Automatic** Faulty transducer/high
Circuit shut down Automatic** Faulty transducer/high
Alert only. None. Automatic Building load greater
RESET METHOD
Manual Configurati on e r r or.
Automatic Failure of cooler pump,
Automatic Failure of cooler pump,
Manual Failure of cooler pump
Automatic Failed module, wiring
Automatic Thermistor circuit open,
Automatic Thermistor circuit open,
Automatic Wiring faulty or module
PROBABLE
CAUSE
liquid level sensor or transducer.
liquid level sensor or transducer.
flow, failed condenser pump
cooler pump interlock, or flow switch
cooler pump interlock, or flow switch
relay or interlock, welded contacts
error, failed transformer , loose connection plug, wrong address
faulty liquid level sensor, wiring error
faulty liquid level sensor, wiring error
oil solenoid failure, oil transducer failure, check valve failed open, oil shut­off va lve closed
oil solenoid failure, oil transducer failure, check valve failed open, oil shut­off va lve closed
oil solenoid failure, oil transducer failure, check valve failed open, oil shut­off va lve closed
oil solenoid failure, oil transducer failure, check valve failed open, oil shut­off va lve closed
transducer failure
failure
pressure switch, low/ restricted condenser air/ water flow ††
pressure switch, low/ restricted condenser air/ water flow ††
than unit capacity, low water/brine flow, or com­pressor fault. Check for other alarms or alerts.
49
Page 50
ALARM/ALERT
CODE
71 Alert Circuit A Low Oil
72 Alert Circuit B Low Oil
73 Alert Circuit A Low Discharge
74 Alert Circuit B Low Discharge
75 Alarm Comp. A1 Max. Oil
76 Alarm Comp. A2 Max. Oil
77 Alarm Comp. B1 Max. Oil
78 Alarm Comp. B2 Max. Oil
79 Alarm Comp. A1 Failed Oil
80 Alarm Comp. A2 Failed Oil
81 Alarm Comp. B1 Failed Oil
82 Alarm Comp. B2 Failed Oil
ALARM OR
ALERT
DESCRIPTION
Level/Flow
Level/Flow
Superheat
Superheat
Delta P, check oil line
Delta P, check oil line
Delta P, check oil line
Delta P, check oil line
Solenoid
Solenoid
Solenoid
Solenoid
Table 36 — Alarm and Alert Codes (cont)
WHY WAS THIS
ALARM GENERATED?
Level switch input open for 4th time in same day.
Level switch input open for 4th time in same day.
Superheat < 5 F (2.8 C) for 10 mi nutes
Superheat < 5 F (2.8 C) for 10 mi nutes
(Discharge press - Oil press) > 100 PSI for more than 5 seconds
(Discharge press - Oil press) > 100 PSI for more than 5 seconds
(Discharge press - Oil press) > 100 PSI for more than 5 seconds
(Discharge press - Oil press) > 100 PSI for more than 5 seconds
Diff. Oil pressure > 2.5 PSI during period after oil pump starts and before oil solenoid opens
Diff. Oil pressure > 2.5 PSI during period after oil pump starts and before oil solenoid opens
Diff. Oil pressure > 2.5 PSI during period after oil pump starts and before oil solenoid opens
Diff. Oil pressure > 2.5 PSI during period after oil pump starts and before oil solenoid opens
ACTION TAKEN
BY CONTROL
Circuit A shut down after 4th failure in 24 hours.
Circuit B shut down after 4th failure in 24 hours.
Circuit A shut down Manual Faulty thermistor, trans-
Circuit B shut down Manual Faulty thermistor, trans-
Comp. A1 shut down Manual Plugged oil filter, closed
Comp. A2 shut down Manual Plugged oil filter, closed
Comp. B1 shut down Manual Plugged oil filter, closed
Comp. B2 shut down Manual Plugged oil filter, closed
Comp. A1 not allowed to start
Comp. A2 not allowed to start
Comp. B1 not allowed to start
Comp. B2 not allowed to start
RESET METHOD
Manual Low oil level, failed
Manual Low oil level, failed
Manual Faulty oil solenoid valve
Manual Faulty oil solenoid valve
Manual Faulty oil solenoid valve
Manual Faulty oil solenoid valve
PROBABLE
CAUSE
switch, wiring error, failed DSIO module
switch, wiring error, failed DSIO module
ducer, or EXV, or Econo­mizer. Motor cooling solenoid stuck open.
ducer, or EXV, or Econo­mizer. Motor cooling solenoid stuck open.
oil valve, bad oil sole­noid, compressor oil check valve stuck, oil line check valve stuck, plugged oil strainer
oil valve, bad oil sole­noid, compressor oil check valve stuck, oil line check valve stuck, plugged oil strainer
oil valve, bad oil sole­noid, compressor oil check valve stuck, oil line check valve stuck, plugged oil strainer
oil valve, bad oil sole­noid, compressor oil check valve stuck, oil line check valve stuck, plugged oil strainer
CCN — Carrier Comfort Network CPM — Compression Protection Module DGT — Discharge Gas Temperature EWT — Entering Water Temperature EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve FSM — Flotronic™ System Manager HPS — High-Pressure Switch LCW — Leaving Chilled Water LWT — Leaving Water Temperature MCT_SP — Maximum Condensing Temperature Set Point MTA — Compressor Must Trip Amps SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature SST — Saturated Suction Temperature W/C — Water-Cooled WSM — Water System Manager
*Current imbalance alar m x.25 may be changed to war ning x.27 after suc-
cessful start-up of the chiller.
†Compressors are eq uipped with 2 motor winding temperature th ermistors.
Verify first that the problem is not a wiring error before using backup
thermistor. **Reset automatic first time, manual if repeated on the same date. ††Note that the high-pressure switch should trip before this alert is generated.
Check HPS operation if this alert is generated.
LEGEND
NOTES:
1. Low Oil Pressure Alert Criteria and Set Points Where: P P Two oil pressure set points are used. Oil Set point 1 is always 15 psig. a. If (P b. If (P c. If (P
The 2 set poi nts are used by the control for the Low Oil Pressure alert trip criteria below:
a.Oil Pressure is ignored during the first 5 seconds after a compressor is b.In period between 5 and 120 seconds after starting, the alert will be gen-
c. After 120 seconds of run time, the alert will be generated if:
2. (P
= Discharge Pressure, Ps = Suction pressure,
d
= Oil pressure and Pe = Economizer pressure
o
) < 125, then Oil Set point 2 = 0.235 x (P
d - Ps
) >= 125 and < 165, then Oil Set point 2 = 2.0 x (P
d - Ps
) >= 165, then Oil Set point 2 = 0.6364 x (P
d - Ps
d - Ps
started. erated if (P
onds) f or 3 consecutive readings
1)(P
2)(P
- Pe) is the Oil pressure differential displayed in for Circuit A
o
- Pe) < [(Oil Set point 1)/120] x (Compressor Run time in sec-
o
- Pe) < Oil Set point 1 for 15 seconds OR
o
- Ps) < Oil Set point 2 for 25 seconds
o
and in for Circuit B.
50
) + 0.588
) + 5.0
d - Ps
d - Ps
) - 220.0
Page 51
Table 37 — Hardware Point Communications (Alarm 36) Loss/Action Taken
HARDWARE POINT ALARM PSIO-1 Alarm Relay No Action
CFLOW_SW DSIO-EXV Cooler Flow Switch Chiller shut down COND_ENT PSIO-2 Condenser Entering Water Thermistor Same as Alert 12 COND_LWT PSIO-2 Condenser Leaving Water Thermistor Same as Alert 11 COND_PMP PSIO-2 Condenser Pump Relay Chiller shut down COND_EWT PSIO-2 Cooler Entering Water Thermistor Same as Alarm 10 COND_LWT PSIO-2 Cooler Leaving Water Thermistor Chiller shut down COOL_HTR PSIO-1 Cooler Heater Turn ON Cooler Pump relay COOL_PMP PSIO-1 Cooler Pump Relay No Action DFLOW_SW PSIO-2 Condenser Flow Switch Chiller shut down DISTMP_A PSIO-2 Discharge Gas Temp Circuit A (Oil Temp) Circuit shut down DISTMP_B PSIO-2 Discharge Gas Temp Circuit A (Oil Temp) Circuit shut down DISTMP_B PSIO-2 Discharge Gas Temp Circuit B (Oil Temp) Circuit shut down DMD_SW1 PSIO-2 Demand Limit Switch 1 No Action DMD_SW2 PSIO-2 Demand Limit Switch 2 No Action DPA PSIO-1 Discharge Pressure Circuit A Circuit shut down DPB PSIO-1 Discharge Pressure Circuit B Circuit shut down DUAL PSIO-2 Dual Setpoint Switch Control to Setpoint 1 ECN_PR_A PSIO-1 Circuit A Economizer Pressure Circuit shut down ECN_PR_B PSIO-1 Circuit B Economizer Pressure Circuit shut down EXVA DSIO-EXV Expansion Valve, Circuit A Circuit shut down EXVB DSIO-EXV Expansion Valve, Circuit B Circuit shut down FAN_1 CPM 1 Fan Relay 1 No Action FAN_2 DSIO-HV Fan Relay 2 No Action FAN_3 DSIO-HV Fan Relay 3 No Action FAN_4 CPM 1 Fan Relay 4 No Action FAN_5 DSIO-HV Fan Relay 5 No Action FAN_6 DSIO-HV Fan Relay 6 No Action HC_SW N/A Heat/Cool Switch Chiller shut down HR_EWT N/A Heat Reclaim Entering Water Thermistor No Action HR_LWT N/A Heat Reclaim Lea ving Water Thermistor No Action ICE_DONE PSIO-2 Ice Complete Indicator Disable function ICE_VALV Not Configured Ice Valve Disable function K_A1_FBK CPM 1 Compressor A1 Feedback Compressor shut down K_A1_RLY CPM 1 Compressor A1 Relay Compressor shut down K_A2_FBK CPM 2 Compressor A2 Feedback Compressor shut down K_A2_RLY CPM 2 Compressor A2 Relay Compressor shut down K_B1_FBK CPM 1 Compressor B1 Feedback Compressor shut down K_B1_RLY CPM 1 Compressor B1 Relay Compressor shut down K_B2_FBK CPM 2 Compressor B2 Feedback Compressor shut down K_B2_RLY CPM 2 Compressor B2 Relay Compressor shut down LOADR_A1 PSIO-1 Compressor A1 Loader No Action LOADR_A2 PSIO-1 Compressor A2 Loader No Action LOADR_B1 PSIO-1 Compressor B1 Loader No Action LOADR_B2 PSIO-1 Compressor B2 Loader No Action LMT_MA PSIO-2 Demand Limit 4-20 mA Input Disable function LOR_SW DSIO-EXV Local/Off/Remote Switch Chiller shut down MLV_A PSIO-2/DSIO-HV Min. Load Valve Relay Circuit A Disable function MLV_B PSIO-2/DSIO-HV Min. Load Valve Relay Circuit B Disable function MOTOR_A PSIO-2 Circuit A Motormaster MOTOR_B PSIO-2 Circuit B Motormaster Output Disable function MTRCL_A1 CPM 1 Compressor A1 Motor Cooling Compressor s hut down MTRCL_A2 CPM 2 Compressor A2 Motor Cooling Compressor s hut down MTRCL_B1 CPM 1 Compressor B1 Motor Cooling Compressor s hut down MTRCL_B2 CPM 2 Compressor B2 Motor Cooling Compressor s hut down OAT PSIO-2 Outside Air Temperature Disable function OIL_A1 PSIO-1 Compressor A1 Oil Pressure Transducer Compressor shut down OIL_A2 PSIO-1 Compressor A2 Oil Pressure Transducer Compressor shut down OIL_B1 PSIO-1 Compressor B1 Oil Pressure Transducer Compressor shut down OIL_B2 PSIO-1 Compressor B2 Oil Pressure Transducer Compressor shut down OILA_HTR DSIO-HV Circuit A Oil Heater Disable function OILA_SW DSIO-EXV Circuit A Oil Level Circuit shut down OILB_HTR DSIO-HV Circuit B Oil Heater Disable function OILB_SW DSIO-EXV Circuit B Oil Level Circuit shut down OILPMP_A PSIO-2 Circuit A Oil Pump No Action OILPMP_B PSIO-2 Circuit B Oil Pump No Action OILSOL_A CPM 1 Circuit A Oil Solenoid Circuit shut down OILSOL_B CPM 1 Circuit B Oil Solenoid Circuit shut down P_REF PSIO-1 5 Volt Transducer Reference Chiller shut down RALARMx PSIO-1/PSIO-2 Remote Alarm Relay x (1-16) Disable function RST_MA PSIO-2 Temp. Reset 4-20 mA signal Disable function SPA PSIO-1 Circuit A Suction Transducer Circuit shut down SPB PSIO-1 Circuit B Suction Transducer Circuit shut down TLEV_A PSIO-1 Circuit A Cooler Level Sensor Control EXV-A by discharge superheat TLEV_B PSIO-1 Circuit B Cooler Level Sensor Control EXV-B by discharge superheat TMTR_A1 CPM 1 Compressor A1 Motor Thermistor Compressor shut down TMTR_A2 CPM 2 Compressor A2 Motor Thermistor Compressor shut down TMTR_B1 CPM 1 Compressor B1 Motor Thermistor Compressor shut down TMTR_B2 CPM 2 Compressor B2 Motor Thermistor Compressor shut down T_SPA CE PSIO-2 External Space Temp Thermistor Disable function VALVE_A PSIO-2 Circuit A Water Valve Control Circuit shut down VALVE_B PSIO-2 Circuit B Water Valve Control Circuit shut down
SENSING/CONTROLLING
MODULE
CONTROL POINT NAME
®
Output Disable function
ACTION TAKEN UNTIL
COMMUNICATION RESTORED
51
Page 52
Table 38 — Illegal Configurations (Alarm 50) Recognized by PSIO-1
CODE
NUMBER
MOP — Minimum Operating Temperature OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature
Incorrect Check Sum in configuration code
1
(factory or service code)
2 Unit type outside range of 1-3 3 Number of compressors in a circuit outside the range of 0-2 4 Air cooled chiller with a fan type outside the range of 1-16 5 Air cooled chiller with Low Temperature Brine fluid 6 Wa ter cooled chiller configured for air cooled head pressure
Selecting both OAT and Spa ce T emp sensors for External
7
Reset operation
8 Air cooled chiller with condenser water pump 9 Air cooled chiller with condenser thermistors
MOP set point is outside the range of 40 to 55 F
10
(4.4 to 12.8 C) Maximum Condensing Temperature set point (MCT_SP) is
11
outside the range of 0 to 158 F (–17.8 to 70 C)
LEGEND
EXD Troubleshooting Procedur e —
ILLEGAL CONFIGURATION
DESCRIPTION
Follow steps
below to diagnose and correct EXV/Economizer problems.
On 30HX units with economizers, verify that the valve for the bubbler tube (bottom of economizer) is open. Check EXV motor operation first. Press on the HSIO II keypad and select the appropriate EXV. Press to move the
ENTER
valve to 25%. You should be able to feel the actuator moving by placing your hand on the EXV or economizer body (the ac­tuator is located about one-half to two-thirds of the way up from the bottom of the economizer shell). Press three
ENTER
more times until the display reads 100% for a Target Percent (waiting until actuator stops each time). A hard knocking should be felt from the actuator when it reaches the top of its stroke (can be heard if surroundings are relatively quiet). Press
ENTER ENTER
again if necessary to confirm this. Press four times to step the actuator closed in 25% increments, wait­ing again in between each move. The actuator should knock
when it reaches the bottom of its stroke. If it is believed that the valve is not working properly, continue with the checkout pro­cedure below:
Check the EXV output signals at appropriate terminals on EXV driver module (see Fig. 12). Connect positive test lead to terminal 1 on the EXV driver for Circuit A and to terminal 7 for Circuit B. Set meter for approximately 20 vdc. Enter V a lves and Motor Master test subfunction by pressing on the HSIO. The EXV for Circuit A will be displayed; if desired, press the down arrow key for Circuit B. When at the desired valve, press . The display should change to show a
ENTER
T arget Percent of 25%. The dri ver should drive the circuit EXV under test. During the next several seconds, connect negative test lead to pins 2, 3, 4, and 5 in succession (pi ns 8, 9, 10 and 1 1 for Circuit B). Voltage should rise and fall at each pin. If it re­mains constant at a voltage or shows 0 volts, remove the con­nector to the valve and recheck.
Press to close the circui t EXV. Check the D SIO
ENTER
address setting (the address should be 50). If a problem still ex­ists, replace the EXV driver module. If the voltage reading is correct, the expansion valve and EXV wiring should be checked. Check the EXV terminal strip and interconnecting wiring.
1. Check color coding and wire connections. Make sure they
are connected to the correct terminals at the EXV driver and EXV plug and that the cables are not crossed.
2. Check for continuity and tight connection at all pin
terminals.
Check the resistance of the EXV motor windings. Remove the DSIO-EXV plug J4 terminal strip and check the resistance between the common lead (red wire, terminal D) and remain­ing leads, A, B, C, and E (see Fig. 12). The resistance shoul d be 25 ohms ± 2 ohms.
EXV DRIVER BOARD, J4
1
1
2
3
4
5
2
7
8
9
10
Electronic Expansion
EXV —
Valv e
11
Fig. 12 — EXV Cable Connections to EXV Driver Module, DSIO-EXV
RED
GRN
WHT
BLK
BRN
RED
GRN
WHT
BLK
BRN
52
D
RED
C
ORN
E
YEL
B
BRN
A
BLK
D
RED
C
ORN
E
YEL
B
BRN
A
BLK
EXV-A
EXV-B
Page 53
INSPECTING/OPENING ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVES
IMPORTANT: Obtain replacement O-ring before open­ing EXV. Do not reuse O-rings.
To check the physical operation of an EXV, the following
steps must be performed:
1. Close the liquid line service valve of the circuit to be checked. Put the LOR switch in the OFF position. Using the HSIO, enter the manual service mode by pressing . Enable the mode by pressing . Switch the LOR
ENTER
switch to the Local position. Scroll down to the desired compressor and press to turn it on. Let compressor
ENTER
run until gage on suction pressure port reads between 5 and 10 psig. Press to turn the compressor off. Immedi-
ENTER
ately after the compressor shuts off, close the discharge valve.
2. Remove any remaining refrigerant from the system low side using proper reclaiming techniques. Drain oil from cooler using Schrader port in cooler inlet line. Turn off the line voltage power supply to the compressors and control circuit power.
3. Remove screws holding top cover of EXV. Carefully remove the top cover from the EXV making sure EXV plug is still connected.
IMPORTANT: When removing top cover from EXVs, be careful to avoid damage to motor leads.
4. Enter the appropriate EXV test step for EXV-A or EXV-B by pressing on the HSIO. Scroll down to display the desired EXV. Press and to initiate the test.
ENTER
Observe the operation of the valve motor a nd lead screw. The motor should turn counterclockwise, and the lead screw should move up out of the motor hub until the valve is fully open. Lead screw movement should be smooth and uniform from fully closed to fully open position. Press as
ENTER
needed to reach 100% open. Wait 30 seconds in between each step for motor to stop moving. Press to check
ENTER
open to closed operation. If the valve is properly connected to the processor and receiving correct signals, yet does not operate as described above, the valve should be replaced.
INSPECTING/OPENING ECONOMIZERS — To check the physical operation of an economizer (see Fig. 13), the follow­ing steps must be performed:
1. Close the liquid line service valve of the circuit to be checked. Put the LOR switch in the OFF position. Using the HSIO, enter the manual service mode by pressing . Enable the mode by pressing . Switch the LOR
ENTER
switch to the Local position. Scroll down to the desired compressor and press to turn it on. Let compressor
ENTER
run until gage on suction pressure port reads between 5 and 10 psig (34.5 and 69.0 kPa). Press to turn the com-
ENTER
pressor off. Immediately after the compressor shuts off, close the discharge valve and the bubbler valve on 30HX units (located in elbow fitting on condenser shell). For 30GX units, there is no shutoff valve in the bubbler tube line.
2. Remove any remaining refrigerant from the system low side and discharge piping using proper reclaiming techniques. Drain oil from cooler using Schrader port in cooler inlet line. Turn off the line voltage power supply to the compressors and control circuit power.
3. Remove the shell retaining bolts on the bottom of the econo­mizer and the bolts th at secure the shel l to the unit fram e or mounting bracket. Cut the motor cooling line leaving the top of the economizer. Carefully remove the shell from the economizer. Make sure EXV plug is still connected. The economizer shell is heavy. Use caution when removing shell.
IMPORTANT: When removing shell from economizer, it must be lifted off as close to vertical as possible to prevent damage to any of the internal parts. Use a catch pan beneath the economizer as oil will come out when the shell is removed. Be careful to avoid damage to motor leads.
4. Enter the appropriate EXV test step for EXV-A or EXV-B by pressing on the HSIO. Scroll down to display the desired EXV. Press and to initiate the test.
ENTER
Observe the operation of the valve motor and lead screw. The motor should turn counterclockwise, and the lead screw should move up out of the motor hub until the valve is fully open. Lead screw movement should be smooth and uniform from fully closed to fully open position. Press as
ENTER
needed to reach 100% open. Wait 30 seconds in between each step for motor to stop moving. Press to check
ENTER
open to closed operation. If the valve is properly connected to the processor and receiving correct signals, yet does not operate as described above, the economizer should be replaced.
5. Additional items to check for: a. Verify that float assembly (see cross section view in
Fig. 13) moves up and down freely. It should take only a minimal force (less than one pound) to move the float and there should be no binding.
b. Check the bubbler tube (found by carefully lifting the
float) for crimps, etc. and verify that the end of the tube is open.
6. Reassemble economizer; retorque shell retaining bolts to 35 ft-lb (48 N-m).
If operating problems persist after reassembly, they may be due to a bad liquid level sensor, suction pressure transducer or intermittent connections between the processor board terminals and EXV plug. Recheck all wiring connections and voltage signals.
Other possible causes of improper refrigerant flow control could be restrictions in the liquid line. Check for plugged strainer(s) or restricted metering slots in the EXV or economiz­er. Formation of ice or frost on lower body of electronic expan­sion valve is one symptom of restricted metering slots. Howev­er, frost or ice formation is normally expected when leaving fluid temperature from the cooler is below 40 F (4.4 C). Clean or replace valve if necessary.
NOTE (non-economizer units only): Frosting of valve is nor­mal during compressor test steps and at initial start-up. Frost should dissipate after 5 to 10 minutes operation in a system that is operating properly. If valve is to be replaced, wrap valve with a wet cloth to prevent excessive heat from damaging internal components.
53
Page 54
STEPPER MOTOR
OUTLET FOR MOTOR COOLING LINE CONNECTION
STEPPER MOTOR HARNESS
MOUNTING
FLOAT ASSEMBLY
DISCHARGE GAS BUBBLER TUBE
OUTLET TO BOTTOM OF COOLER
BRACKET BOLTS
SHELL BOLTS
LIQUID INLET TUBE FROM CONDENSER
Fig. 13 — 30GX,HX Cutaway View of
Economizer Assembly
SERVICE
Servicing Coolers and Condenser s —
er heads and partition plates are removed, tube sheets ar e ex­posed showing the ends of tubes. The 30GX,HX units use a flooded cooler design. W a ter flows inside the tubes.
TUBE PLUGGING — A leaky tube in one circuit can be plugged until retubing can be done. The number of tubes plugged determines how soon the cooler must be retubed. All tubes in the 30GX and 30HX coolers and 30HX condensers can be removed. Loss of unit capacity and efficiency as well as increased pump power will result from plugging tubes. Failed tubes should be replaced as soon as possible. Up to 10% of the total number of tubes can be plugged before retubing is neces­sary . Figure 14 shows an Elliot t t ube pl ug and a cross-s ectional view of a plug in place. The same components for plugging and rolling tubes can be used for all coolers and 30HXC con­densers. See Table 39. If tube failure is in both circuits, using tube plugs will not correct problem. Contact your Carrier rep­resentative for assistance.
When cool-
PIN
PIN
RING
PIN AND RING INSTALLED
RING
TUBE SHEET
TUBE
Fig. 14 — Tube Plugging
Table 39 — Plugging Components
COMPONENTS FOR PLUGGING PART NUMBER
For Tubes
Brass Pin Brass Ring
For Holes without Tubes
Brass Pin Brass Ring
Roller Extension Loctite Locquic
*Order directly from: Elliott Tube Company, Dayton, Ohio. †Can be obtained locally .
853103-1A*
853002-640*
853103-1A*
853002-738*
S82-112/11
No. 675†
“N”†
Table 40 — Tube Diameters
ITEM INCHES MILLIMETERS
Tube sheet hole diameter: Tube OD Tube ID after rolling:
(includes expansion due to clearance)
NOTE: Tubes replaced along heat exchanger head partitions must be flush with tube sheet.
0.756 19.20
0.750 19.05
0.650 16.51 to to
0.667 16.94
Use extreme care when installing plugs to prevent damage to the tube sheet section between the holes.
RETUBING (See Table 40) — When retubing is to be done, obtain service of qualified personnel experienced in boiler maintenance and repair. Most standard procedures can be fol­lowed when retubing the 30GX and 30HX heat exchangers. A 7% crush is recommended when rolling replacement tubes into the tubesheet. A 7% crush can be achieved by setting the torque on the gun at 48 to 50 in.-lb (5.4 to 5.6 N-m).
The following Elliott Co. tube rolling tools are required: B3400 Expander Assembly B3405 Mandrel
B3401 Cage B3408 Rolls
Place one drop of Loctite No. 675 or equivalent on top of tube prior to rolling. This material is intended to “wick” into the area of the tube that is not rolled into the tube sheet, and
prevent fluid from accumulating between the tube and the tube sheet. New tubes must also be rolled into the center tube sheet to prevent circuit-to-circuit refrigerant leakage.
TIGHTENING COOLER/CONDENSER HEAD BOLTS O-Ring Preparation
— When reassembling cooler and con­denser heads, always check the condition of the O-ring(s) first. The O-ring should be replaced if there are any visible signs of deterioration, cuts or damage. Apply a thin film of grease to the O-ring before installation. This will aid in holding the O-ring into the groove while the head is installed. Torque all bolts to the following specification and in the sequence shown in Fig. 15.
3
/4-in. Diameter Perimeter and
Plate Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 to 225 ft-lb
(271 to 305 N-m)
54
Page 55
9
10
6
3
5
2
BLANK PLATE
6
3
9
11
5
10
12
2
1
8
12
6
3
1
8
11
9
10
14
12
13
11
4
7
5
2
BLANK PLATES
4
7
Fig. 15 — Cooler and Condenser Head Recommended Bolt Torque Sequence
1. Install all bolts finger tight.
2. Follow numbered sequence shown for head type being installed. This will apply even pressure to the O-ring.
3. Apply torque in one-third steps until required torque is reached. Load all bolts to each one-third step before pro­ceeding to the next one-third step.
4. No less than one hour later, retighten all bolts to required torque values.
5. Restore water/brine flow and check for leaks. Fix leaks as necessary. Replace insulation (on cooler heads only).
Inspecting/Cleaning Heat Exchangers
COOLERS — Inspect and clean the cooler tubes at the end of the first operating season. Because these tubes have internal ridges, a rotary-type tube cleaning system is necessary to fully clean the tubes. Tube condition i n the cooler will determine the scheduled frequency for cleaning, and will indicate whether water treatment is adequate in the chi lled water/brine circuit . Inspect the entering and leaving thermistors for signs of corro­sion or scale. Replace the sensor if corroded or remove any scale if found.
CONDENSERS (30HX Only) — Since this water circuit is usually an open-type system, the tubes may be subject to con­tamination and scale. Clean the condenser tubes with a rotary tube cleaning system at regular intervals, and more often if the water is contaminated. Inspect the entering and leaving con­denser water thermistors (if installed) for signs of corrosion or scale. Replace the sensor if corroded or remove any scale if found.
Higher than normal condenser pressures, together with in­ability to reach full refrigeration load, usually indicate dirty tubes or air in the machine. If the refrigeration log indicates a rise above normal condenser pressures, check the condenser re­frigerant temperature against the leaving condenser water tem­perature. If this reading is more than what the design difference is supposed to be, then the condenser tubes may be dirty, or wa­ter flow may be incorrect. Due to the pressure in the R-134a
1
8
14
13
11
6
3
1
10
16
8
9
12
14
15
13
4
7
5
2
4
7
system, air usually will not enter the machine; the refrigerant will leak out.
During the tube cleaning process, use brushes specially de­signed to avoid scraping and scratching the tube wall. Contact your Carrier representative to obtain these brushes. Do not use wire brushes.
Hard scale may require chemical tre atment for its preven­tion or removal. Consult a water treatment specialist for proper treatment procedures.
Water Treatment —
Untreated or improperly treated water may result in corrosion, scaling, erosion, or algae. The services of a qualified water treatment specialist should be ob­tained to develop and monitor a treatment program.
Water must be within design flow limits, clean and treated to ensure proper machine performance and reduce the potential of tubing damage due to corrosion, scaling, ero­sion, and algae. Carrier assumes no responsibility for chiller or condenser damage resulting from untreated or improperly treated water.
Condenser Coils (30GX Only)
COIL CLEANING — Clean coils with a vacuum cleaner, fresh water, compressed air, or a bristle brush (not wire). Units installed in corrosive environments should have coil cleaning as part of a planned maintenance schedule. In this type of application, all accumulations of dirt should be cleaned off the coil.
Do not use high-pressure water or air to clean coils as fin damage may result.
55
Page 56
Condenser Fans (30GX Only) —
PLASTIC FAN PROPELLER
CLEARANCE OF 0.25 INCHES (6.4 MM) FOR STANDARD CONDENSER FANS
FAN DECK SURFACE
FAN ORIFICE
Fig. 16 — Condenser Fan Position (Standard Fan)
Fig. 17 — Condenser Fan Position
(High Static Fan)
Each fan is sup­ported by a formed wire mount bolted to a fan deck and cov­ered with a wire guard. The exposed end of the fan motor shaft is protected from weather by grease. If the fan motor must be removed for service or replacement, be sure to regrease fan shaft and reinstall fan cover, retaining clips, and fan guard. For proper performance, the fans should be positioned as shown in Fig. 16 or 17. Tighten setscrews to 14 ± 1 ft-lb (18 ± 1.3 N-m).
Check for proper rotation of the fan(s) once reinstalled (clockwise for high static and counterclockwise for standard viewed from above). If necessary to reverse, switch leads at contactor(s) in control box.
Refrigerant Charging/Adding Charge
IMPORTANT: These units are designed for use with
R-134a only. DO NOT USE ANY OTHER REFRIG-
ERANT in these units without first consulting your Car-
rier repr esen ta ti ve.
When adding or removing charge, circulate water through the condenser (30HXC) and cooler at all times to prevent freezing. Freezing damage is considered abuse and may void the Carrier warranty.
DO NOT OVERCHARGE system. Overcharging results in higher discharge pressure with higher cooling fluid con­sumption, possible compressor damage and higher power consumption.
MOTOR SHAFT
2.15 IN.
POSITION TOP OF HIGH STATIC FAN PROPELLER HUB
2.15 INCHES (54.6 mm) ABOVE FAN DECK SURFACE
FAN HUB
STATIC FAN PROPELLER
FAN DECK SURFACE
Indication of low charge on a 30HXC system: NOTE: To check for low refrigerant charge on a 30HXC, sev-
eral factors must be considered. A flashing liquid-line sight glass is not necessarily an indication of inadequate charge. There are many system conditions where a flashing sight glass occurs under normal operation. The 30HXC metering device is designed to work properly under these conditions.
1. Make sure that the circuit is running at a full-load condition.
To check whether circuit A is ful ly loaded, enter on the HSIO keypad. The display will read “CIRCUIT A ANALOG VALUES.” Using the down arrow key on the keypad, scroll down once to “T otal C apacity.” If this value is 100%, the circuit is at full load. To check circuit B, follow the same procedure, but enter on the keypad.
2. It may be necessary to use the Manual Control feature to
force the circuit into a full-load condition. If this is the case, see the instructions for using the Manual Control feature in T able 22 of this manual.
3. With the circuit running at full load, verify that the cooler
leaving fluid temperature is in the range of 38 to 46 F (3.3 to
7.8 C). Check pressure drop across liquid line strainer. Strainer is cleanable if necessary.
4. At this condition, observe the refrigerant in the liquid line
sight glass. If there is a clear sight glass, and no signs of flashing, then the circuit is adequately charged. Skip the remaining steps.
5. If the refrigerant appears to be flashing, the circuit is proba-
bly low on charge. Verify this by checking the EXV Percent Open. This information can be accessed by entering
on the HSIO keypad for Circuit A, or for Circuit B. Scroll down using the down arrow key on the keypad, until EXV Percent Open is displayed.
6. If the EXV Percent Open is greater than 60%, and the liquid-line sight glass is flashing, then the circuit is low on charge. Follow the procedure for adding charge for 30HXC units.
T o add charge to the 30HXC systems:
1. Make sure that the unit is running at full load, and that the cooler leaving fluid temperature is in the range of 42 to 46 F (5.6 to 7.8 C).
2. At these operating conditions, check the liquid line sight glass. If there is a cl ear sight glass, then the unit has suffi­cient charge. If the sight glass is flashing, then check the EXV Percent Open. If this is greater than 60%, then begin adding charge.
NOTE: A flashing liquid line sight glass at operating condi­tions other than those mentioned above is not necessarily an indication of low refrigerant charge.
3. Add 5 lb (2.3 kg) of liquid charge into the cooler using the
1
/4-in. Schrader-type fitting located on the tube entering the bottom of the cooler. This fitting is located between the Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) (size 076-146 units), or the economizer (size 161-271 units) and the cooler.
4. Observe the EXV Percent Open value. The EXV should begin closing as charge is being added. Allow the unit to stabilize. If the EXV Percent Open remains above 60%, and the sight glass continues flashing, add an additional 5 lb (2.3 kg) of liquid charge.
5. Allow the unit to stabilize, and again check the EXV Percent Open. Continue adding 5 lb (2.3 kg) at a time of liquid refrigerant charge, and allow the unit to stabilize before checking the EXV position.
6. When the EXV Percent Open is in the range of 40 to 60%, check the liquid line sight glass. Slowly add enough addi­tional liquid charge to ensure a clear sight glass. This should be done slowly to avoid overcharging the unit.
56
Page 57
7. Verify adequate charge by continuing to run at full load with 42 to 46 F (5.6 to 7.8 C) cooler leaving fluid temperature. Check that the refrigerant is not flashing in the liquid-line sight glass. The EXV Percent Open should be between 40 and 60%. The cooler level indicator should be in the range of 1.5 to 2.2.
Indication of low charge on a 30HXA, GX systems:
1. Make sure that the circuit is running at a full load condition and all condenser fans are energized and running at full speed. To check whether circuit A is fully loaded, enter
on the HSIO keypad. The display will read “CIR­CUIT A ANALOG VALU ES.” Using the down arrow key on the keypad, scroll down once to “Total Capacity.” If this value is 100%, the circuit is at full load. To check circuit B, follow the same procedure, but enter on the keypad.
2. It may be necessary to use the Manual Control feature to force the circuit into a full-load condition. If this is the case, see the instructions for using the Manual Control feature in T able 22 on page 33 of this manual.
3. With the circuit running at full-load, verify that the cooler leaving fluid temperature is in the range of 38 to 48 F (5.6 to
7.8 C).
4. For 30HXA chillers, raise the compressor discharge to approximately 125 F (51.7 C) saturated discharge tempera­ture (185 psig [1276 kPa]). For 30GX chillers, raise the compressor discharge to approximately 130 F (54.4 C) satu­rated discharge temperature (198 psig [1366 kPa]). Measure the liquid temperature entering the expansion device for 30HXA units. For 30GX units, measure the liquid tempera­ture after the tee where all liquid lines have joined. The liq­uid temperature should be approximately 107 F (41.7 C) for optimum charge. If the temperature is greater than 107 F (41.7 C) and the sight glass is flashing, the circuit is under­charged.
5. Add 5 lb (2.3 kg) of liquid charge into the cooler using the
1
/4-in. Schrader-type fitting located on the tube entering the bottom of the cooler. This fitting is located between the Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) (30HXA076- 146 units, 30GX080-090 units), or the economizer (30HXA161-271 units, 30GX105-350 units) and the cooler.
6. Allow the system to stabilize and then recheck the liquid temperature. Repeat Step 5 as needed allowing the system to stabilize between each charge addition. Slowly add charge as the sight glass begins to clear to avoid overcharging.
Oil Charging/Low Oil Recharging
Addition of oil charge to 30HX,GX systems:
1. If the 30HX,GX unit shuts off repeatedly on Lo w Oil Level
(Alert number 71 or 72), this may be an indication of inad­equate oil charge. It could also mean simply that oil is in the process of being reclaimed from the low-side of the system.
2. Begin by running the unit at full load for 1
Manual Control feature of the software if the unit does not normally run at full load.
1
/2 hours. Use the
3. After running the unit for 1
1
/2 hours, allow the unit to restart and run normally. If the Low Oil Level alarms per­sist, continue following this procedure.
ENTER
on the keypad, at the appropriate line on the display.
5. Before starting the compressor, the unit will go through its normal pre-lube pump routine. If there is an insufficient level of oil in the oil separator, the compressor will not start, and a pre-start oil pressure alarm will be posted. Skip to Step 8.
6. If the compressor starts successfully, observe the cooler pressure gage. When this gage reads approximately 10 psig, press on the HSIO keypad, and move the
ENTER
LOR switch to the off position.
7. Open the liquid line service valve and allow the unit to restart and run normally. If the Low Oil Level alarms per­sist, continue following this procedure.
8. If none of the previous steps were successful, the unit is low on oil charge. Add oil to the oil separator using the
1
/4-in. Schrader-type fitting on the discharge line entering the top of the oil separator (30HX units) or through the Schrader fitting on the top of the oil separator (30GX units).
Do not add oil at any other location as improper unit opera­tion may result.
9. Make sure that the unit is not running when adding oil, as this will make the oil charging process e asier. Because the system is under pressure even when the unit is not running, it will be necessary to use a suitable pump (hand pump or electric pump) to add oil to the system.
10. Using a suitable pump, add
®
matic
SW-220 Polyolester oil (Carrier Specification
1
/2 gal. (1.89 L) of Castrol Ice-
number is PP47-32; absolutely no substitutes are approved) to the system. Make sure that the oil level safety switch is NOT jumpered, and allow the unit to re start and run normally. Do not exceed maximum oil change. See Table 41.
11. If low oil level problems persist, add another 1.89 L
1
(
/2 gal.) of oil. Continue adding oil in 1.89 L (1/2 gal.) increments until the probl em is resol ved. If it is necess ary to add more than 5.75 L (1.5 gallons) of oil to the system, contact your Carrier distributor service department.
Table 41 — Maximum Oil Charges
UNIT
SIZE 30GX080-176 30GX205-265 30GX281-350
30HXA076-186 30HXC076-186
30HXA,C206-271
CIRCUIT A
(gal)
CIRCUIT A
5.0 18.9 5.0 18.9
7.0 26.5 5.0 18.9
7.0 26.5 7.0 26.5
5.0 18.9 5.0 18.9
4.5 17.0 4.5 17.0
7.5 28.4 5.0 18.9
(L)
CIRCUIT B
(gal)
CIRCUIT B
(L)
57
Page 58
Oil Filter Maintenance —
JUNCTION BOX OIL BLEED PORT
HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH
LOADER SOLENOID NO. 1
INTERNAL OIL FILTER ACCESS (3/4 in.)
OIL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
OIL SOLENOID
LOADER SOLENOID NO. 2
LOADER COVER PLATE
Fig. 18 — Transducer Removal
own internal oil filter and each circuit also has an in-line exter­nal filter. The internal oil filter pressure drop should be checked and filter changed (if necessary) after the initial 200­300 hours of compressor operation. It is recommended that oil line pressure loss checks be made on an annual basis thereafter to determine the need for filter changes. The need for filter maintenance can be monitored through system pressure drop. Discharge pressure is read at the oil separator and oil pressure is read at the compressor. This pressure differential is typically 15 to 20 psi (103 to 138 kPa) for a system with clean internal and external filters. See Pressure Transducers section, page 61 for information on removing discharge pressure transducers to measure discharge pressure. Figure 18 shows the location of the oil pressure bleed port on the compressor. A gage can be attached to this point so that two pressure drops can be mea­sured. The difference between discharge pressure and the gage pressure will be the pressure loss due mainly to the external oil filter. If this value exceeds 10 psi (69 kPa), replace the external filter. The difference between the gage pressure and compres­sor oil pressure is the pressure drop through the internal oil fil­ter. Replace the interna l oil fil ter if th e pres sure d rop is gr e ate r than 25 psi (173 kPa) for 30HXC and 30 psi (207 kPa) for 30GX and 30HXA chillers.
REPLACING THE EXTERNAL OIL FILTER
Compressor oil is pressurized. Use prope r safety precau­tions when relieving pressure.
the compressor. Connect a charging hose to the oil pressure bleed port and drain the oil trapped between service valves. A quart (liter) of oil is typically what is removed during this pro­cess. Remove the charging hose.
the old filter. Remove protective plastic caps from new filter and install. Draw a vacuum at the bleed port. Remove charging hose. Open angle valve enough to let oil flow. Check both fit­tings for leaks and repair if necessary. Backseat angle valve.
REPLACING THE INTERNAL OIL FILTER — Close the service valves at the compressor and drain the oil using the bleed port. If the oil pressure does not bleed off using this method it will be necessary to remove the entire circuit charge. Using a cover (see Fig. 18 and 19). Remove the old filter. Replacement filters (one for each compressor) are factory supplied to cover the first changeout. After that, filters are field supplied. Lightly oil O-ring in the filter and install with filter open end first into the housing. Replace access cover and retorque to 150 ft-lb (203 N-m). Follow procedure in previous section for opening angle valve and purging lines. Check for leaks and repair if necessary.
Compressor Changeout Sequence —
sor service requires metric tools and hardware. Change com­pressors according to the following procedure:
1. Turn off all main and control circuit power supplying the
2. Close the discharge and liquid valve(s), suction valve, and
3. Remove any remaining refrigerant in the compressor and
Each compressor has its
Fully front seat (close) the angle valves on the filter and at
Unscrew the nut from the other side of the filter and remove
3
/4-in. allen wrench, remove the internal filter ac cess
Compres-
machine.
cooler inlet line service valve (if equipped), oil line shutoff valve, economizer bubble tube valve (30HXA,C161-271 only) and minimum load shutoff valve (if equipped) for circuit to be changed. Disconnect the oil inlet line from the compressor. Disconnect oil filter with fitting at shutoff valve side and set filter and compressor inlet line assembly aside.
refrigerant lines using proper reclaiming techniques. All of
the refrigerant that is in the cooler must be removed if there is no suction service valve installed on the cooler .
IMPORTANT: Cooler and condenser pumps must be energized. Fluid must be flowing through heat exchang­ers whenever adding or removing charge.
4. Remove junction box cover of compressor to be changed. Check main power leads for marked numbers. If no num­bers are visible on leads, mark leads with appropriate numbers to match those printed on the ends of the terminal lugs. This is extremely important as power leads
MUST be installed on the exact terminals from which they were removed.
5. Disconnect main power leads from compressor terminal lugs. Mark remaining control circuit wires (connected together with wire nuts) for ease of reconnecting later. The following color scheme applies (verify with label diagram on panel):
Loader 1 2 V i olet wires Loader 2 2 Pink wires Motor Cooling Solenoid 1 Blue wire, 1 Brown wire * Oil Solenoid 1 Orange wire, 1 Brown wire* High-Pressure Switch 2 Red wires
*One lead from the motor cooling and oil solenoids are connected
together with a single brown wire.
6. Remove loader (mark solenoids no. 1 and 2 for replace­ment) and oil solenoids and high-pressure switch from compressor. Using 2 wrenches, carefully remove the oil pressure transducer from the compressor. These will all be reconnected to the replacement compressor.
NOTE: Some oil will leak out of the transducer fitting
when the transducer is removed. See Fig. 18.
7. Mark motor temperature leads (2 blue wires) and remove from quick connect terminals in the junction box.
The next steps involve compressor unbolting and removal. Compressor seals are made using O-rings. Use care when removing bolts and disconnecting flanges. The O-rings must NOT be re-used. New O-rings are provided with the replacement compressor. The 06N screw compressors weigh approximately 920 lb (417 kg). Be sure that an appropriate lifting cart or hoist is used to avoid injury. See Fig. 20 for lifting locations and center of gravity dimen­sions. Make sure compressor is properly rigged before unbolting.
8. Remove the 2 bolts securing the motor cooling/economizer
line flange to the compressor.
58
Page 59
9. Remove the four M14 bolts securing the discharge line
Fig. 19 — Compressor Component Diagram
flange to the compressor. Two of the bolts also secure the mounting bracket for the external oil filter. Support the oil line to prevent damage to the line while the compressor is being changed. For 30GX units, place temporary protec­tion over coils to prevent fin and tube damage.
10. Move lifting apparatus into place and attach to the 2 lifting rings on the compressor. Apply minimal tension to hold the compressor while the remaining bolts are removed.
11. Remove the
3
/8-in. holddown bolt securing the foot at the discharge end of the compressor to the mounting bracket on the cooler. A foot bracket will be mounted to the replacement compressor.
12. Remove the 4 lockwashers and nuts securing the compres­sor to the suction flange of the cooler. The compressor is held in place using four M14 x 2 studs through the suction nozzle of the cooler. The studs have an E-12 external Torx drive head. If possible, remove studs; if studs hit the cooler insulation, l eave them in place — th ey will not interfere with compressor removal or installation. Save all the hard­ware as it will be needed to install the replacement compressor.
13. After checking to ensure all lines, wires, conduits, etc. are free and out of the way, remove compressor from cooler. Apply a light film of O-ring grease to new O-ring and place back into groove in mounting flange of compressor. If the new compressor is the A1/A2 (30HX units), A2 (30GX205-265 units) or B2 (30GX281-350 units) com­pressor, remove the compressor junction box and rotate it 180 degrees. Tighten screws to 6.8 to 9.5 N-m (5 to 7 ft-lb). The A1 and A2 compressors are on the right side of the unit when facing the unit control box.
14. Remove suction cover plate and bolts from new compres­sor and set compressor on unit flange. Thread the studs all the way back into the compress or. Install the 4 lockwash­ers and nuts finger-tight. Tighten bolts in a crossing pattern to a range of 81.4 to 135.6 N-m (60 to 100 ft-lb). Do NOT overtighten as damage may result to O-ring. Install and tighten holddown bolt in mounti ng foot .
15. Remove motor cooling/economizer and discharge line cover plates from new compressor.
16. Apply a light film of O-ring grease to motor cooling/econo­mizer and discharge line O-rings, place back into grooves and install flange bolts. Tighten discharge line bolts in a crossing pattern to a range of 81.4 to 135.6 N-m (60 to 100 ft-lb). Tighten motor cooling/economizer bolts to a range of 81.4 to 108.5 N-m (60 to 80 ft-lb). Do NOT over­tighten as damage may result to O-rings.
17. Reconnect the oil filter to the shutoff valve and oil line to the compressor. Install oil line straight into fitting until fer­rule seats against fitting. Thread packing nut onto fitting and tighten finger tight. Use a backup wrench to finish tightening the nut. Do not overtighten.
18. Reinstall the loader and oil solenoi ds, high-pressure swit ch, and oil pressure transducer. Make sure the loader solenoids are installed on the correct number loader .
19. Reconnect conduits back into compressor junction box. Reconnect all wiring that was removed in Steps 4, 5, and
7. Temporarily install the reverse rotation low pressure switch that is supplied with the replacement compressor. Connect the switch to the second high pressure port using a standard
1
/4-in. service hose. The switch will not reset until 10 psig of pressure is present on the switch. Tempo­rarily wire the reverse rotation low pressure switch in series with the compressor’s high pressure switch as shown in Fig. 21.
20. Leak check compressor and refrigerant lines with nitrogen. Repair any leaks found. Remove nitrogen from system.
Evacuate compressor and refrigerant lines. Refer to the Refrigerant and Oil Charging sections on pages 56 and 57 for recharging procedures.
21. Open all shutoff valves and leak check the circuit and all fittings and joints. Repair any leaks found.
22. Reset the reverse rotation low pressure switch.
23. Restore main and control power to the machine. Using the HSIO, enter the quick test function by pressing (for compressor A1 or A2 replacement) or (for compressor B1 replacement). Test the operation of the solenoids. Press to test each loader solenoid, then
ENTER
use the key to find the motor cooling and oil solenoids and test them in the same manner. Pressing the key after each output turns the solenoid off (o r press ).
ENTER
It is important that the loaders are located properly (loader 1 on right hand side when viewed from side opposite con­trol box on 30HX units, on left hand side when reaching over compressor to far side on 30GX units).
24. Start the compressor using the Manual mode. Press
at the HSIO. Press to en able the Man-
ENTER
ual mode. When display changes to “Enable,” switch the Local-Off-Remote switch to the Local position. Se lect th e desired compressor using the down arrow key. Press
ENTER
to start the compressor. Use the down arrow key
and press to energize both loaders. Let the circuit
ENTER
stabilize with both loaders energized. Refer to the Refrig­erant and Oil Charging sections of this document for recharging procedures and performance criteria.
25. Once proper rotation has been verified disconnect and lockout the power to the chiller. The reverse rotation low pressure switch can now be removed from the compressor and high pressure switch circuit.
59
Page 60
ONE LUG AT OUTSIDE EDGE, RING AT
DISCHARGE CENTER
COMPRESSOR LIFTING MECHANISM
CENTER OF GRAVITY OF COMPRESSOR
DISCHARGE END
95 mm (3.75 in.)
178 mm (7.0 in.)
508 mm (20.0 in.)
GEAR COVER END
LIFTING LUGS BOTH OUTSIDE EDGES
COMPRESSOR LIFTING MECHANISM
CENTER OF GRAVITY OF COMPRESSOR
DISCHARGE END
MINIMUM 381 mm (15 in.)
GEAR COVER END
MINIMUM 381 mm (15 in.)
LIFTING LUGS BOTH OUTSIDE EDGES
EQUIDISTANT FROM GEAR COVER END
COMPRESSOR LIFTING MECHANISM
CENTER OF GRAVITY OF COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR SIDE
MINIMUM
300 mm
(11.8 in.)
NOTE: Locate strap from center of gravity lifting ring and support motor casing to provide 3-point level rigging.
MINIMUM
384 mm
(15.1 in.)
MOTOR SIDE
Fig. 20 — Compressor Lifting Diagrams
BURNOUT CLEAN-UP PROCEDURE — If a screw com­pressor motor burns out on a 30GX,HX chiller, a s imple clean­up should be performed. The following procedure provides the minimum steps to be taken before restarting the circuit.
2. Remove the failed compressor following the Compressor Changeout Sequence procedure above.
3. O nce the compressor is removed access the oil catch pan through the cooler-compressor mounting flange. Clean out any debris which may have collected in the oil catch pan.
4. Install a new compressor.
5. To dilute and remove any residual oil left in the separator, pump approximately
1
/2 gallon (2 L) of compressor oil into the oil separator using the Schrader port located on top of the separator (30GX) or on the discharge line (30HX) and remove using the pre-lube pump described in Step 1.
6. Disconnect the hose from the external oil filter service valve.
7. Install a new filter drier and compressor external oil filter.
8. Measure in the amount of Castrol SW 220 Polyolester oil
as specified on the nameplate of the chiller.
9. Leak check, evacuate and recharge the machine as described in this manual with the amount of R-134a stated on the chiller nameplate.
10. Perform periodic acid checks on the circuit and change the filter drier in the motor cooling line as necessary. Use the Carrier Standard Service Techniques Manual as a source of reference.
Moisture-Liquid Indicator —
Clear flow of liquid refrigerant indicates sufficient charge in the system. Note, however, that bubbles in the sight glass do not necess arily indi­cate insufficient charge. Moisture in the sy stem is measured in parts per million (ppm), changes of color of indicator are:
Green — moisture is below 80 ppm; Yellow-green (chartreuse) — 80 to 225 ppm (caution); Yellow (wet) — above 225 ppm.
Change filter drier at the first sign of moisture in the system. IMPORTANT: Unit must in operation for at least
12 hours before moisture indicator can give an accurate reading. With the unit running, the indicating element must be in contact with liquid refrigerant to give true reading.
LEGEND
HPS — PL — RRS —
High-Pressure Switch Plug Reverse Rotation Switch
HPS
RRS
Fig. 21 — Reverse Rotation Switch Wiring
Filter Drier —
Whenever moisture-liquid indicator shows presence of moisture, replace filter drier. Refer to Carrier Standards Service Technique Manual, Chapter 1, Refrigerants, for details on servicing filter driers. Cleanable strainers have been installed in each circuit’s liquid line to aid in removal of system contaminants and debris.
Liquid Line Service Valve —
ahead of the filter drier and provides a
This valve is located
1
/4-in. Schrader connec­tion (30GX only) for field charging. In combination with com­pressor discharge service valve, each circuit can be pumped down into the high side for servicing.
60
Page 61
Thermistors —
To aid in verifying thermistor perfor­mance, resistances at various temperatures are listed for all thermistors (except motor thermistors) in Tables 42A and 42B. See Tabl e 43 for motor thermistor values.
LOCATION — General location of thermistor sensors and ter­minal connections in the control box are listed in T able 2.
THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT
Liquid level thermistors are installed in the top of the cooler using compression fittings. All other thermistors are installed in wells and will sli de out of the we lls eas ily. The wells are under refrigerant pressure (cooler EWT and L WT are under waterside pressure) and do not need to be removed to replace a faulty thermistor.
T o replace thermistors T1, T2, T5, or T6 (Entering, Leaving
W ater; Discharge Gas Temperature):
Disconnect appropriate wires from PSIO-2 in unit control box. Remove thermistor cable from harness. Remove and dis­card original thermistor from well. Insert new thermistor in well body to its full depth. Add a small amount of thermal con­ductive grease to thermistor probe and well. Thermistors are friction-fit thermistors and will slip back into well located at the cooler head (T1, T2) or at the top of the condenser shell (T5, T6). Secure thermistor to well body with a wire tie to prevent thermistor from working its way out of the well. See Fig. 22.
T o replace thermistors T3 or T4 (Liquid Level Sensors):
See the Inspecting/Opening Economizers section on page 53 for information on transferring the refrigerant charge to the high side. Transfer refrigerant and recover any refriger­ant remaining in the low sid e.
NOTE: A new packing nut and ferrule will be required as the old one is not removable from the old thermistor.
For all units, disconnect plug assembly at liquid level sen­sor. Loosen the packing nut fully from the well threads. Re­move and discard old thermistor and packing nut. Slide new packing nut then ferrule up onto new thermistor probe from in­serted end. Insertion depth is dependent on unit model number. See Fig. 23 and Tabl e 44.
Hand tighten packing nut to position ferrule while holding thermistor in position. With wrench, tighten enough to firmly secure thermistor in place in well. Run new harness wires into main control box for 30GX080-176 and all 30HX units. Re­connect blue wires at PSIO-1 for thermistor reading and red wires to TRAN-7. Reconnect plug assembly to new liquid lev­el sensor for 30GX205-265 units. Restore unit control power only and verify that level thermistor is reading correctly. Check system low side for leaks and repair as necessary. Evacuate low side and open circuit discharge and liquid valves.
T o service compressor motor thermistors:
Two thermistors are factory installed in each compressor. Connections for the thermistors are located in the compres sor junction box. There are 3 terminals for the thermistors: S1, S2, and C. Motor temperature is me asured by leads connected to one of the S terminals and the C terminal. If a compressor mo­tor thermistor failure occurs, verify that there is a true short or open circuit at these terminals. If one of the t hermistors fails, disconnect and relocate the wire on one of the S terminals to the other S termin al (S1 to S2 or S2 to S1). The thermistors are not serviceable in the field. If both of the compressor motor thermistors fail, compressor replacement is required. See Table 43 for motor thermistor temperature and resistance values.
Pressure Transducers —
A single style of pressure
transducer is used for both high- and low-pressure sensing on
the 30GX,HX chillers. The transducers operate on a 5 vdc sup­ply. The power supply for this is a 24 vac to 5 vdc full wave rectified power supply, PS1. See unit component arrangement label for mounting location and terminal connections in the control box. Refer to Fig. 24A and 24B for pressure transducer locations.
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION — Pressure transducers are factory installed on all models to read Dis­charge, Suction, Economizer (reads leaving condenser pres­sure on models without economizer), and Oil pressure. DO NOT attempt to calibrate any of these transducers by the pres­sure gage method unless the transducer is connected to a fully charged refrigerant system. A more accurate method of cali­bration is used by the 30GX,HX software and corrects for ambient temperature when calibrating. Calibrating a transducer when the system is under nitrogen charge will result in an incorrect offset being applied to the reading (due to tempera­ture correction). Although these transducers are calibrated at the factory, replacement transducers require calibration for accurate readings. Calibration is also required when replacing a PSIO. Access to the transducer calibration area is through the Service function and the transducers can be calibrated at the current system pressure using a pressure gage at the same point or exposed to atmospheric pressure. In the example in T able 45, the Circuit A Discharge Pressure transducer has been replaced and needs to be calibrated. A pressure gage has been installed at the transducer and reads 85 psi (must be in the range of –5.0 to 185.0 psi). See Table 45.
Use care when removing the oil pressure transducers from the compressor fitting. The fitting that the transducers mount in is sealed with an O-ring Schrader fitting into the compressor casting. Do NOT overtighten the transducer when replacing after calibration. Hold both fittings with wrenches when removing and reinstalling.
The control will apply the 0.8 psi offset from t he calibration example in Table 45 to all future readings. The calibration pro­cess for any of the other pressure transducers is done in a simi­lar manner. A transducer can also be calibrated at atmospheric pressure by removing the transducer from the system. To do this, carefully unplug the transducer connector. Unscrew the transducer from its mounting location and reconnect the con­nector. Fol low the steps in Table 45 to read the current pressure and enter 0.0 psig as the gage pressure. Remove the connector from the transducer, thread the transducer back onto the fitting from which it was removed (do NOT use thread sealant/com­pound), and reinstall the connector. Maximum of fset is 6 psig.
If it is necessary, all of the transducers may be ca librate d at
0.0 psig. All of the transducers must be removed from the sys­tem and reconnected in atmosphere as described. When com­plete, scroll down under to “Calibrate All at 0 PSIG” and press. A “Yes” will be displayed at this step and will auto­matically change back to “No” once all transducers have been successfully calibrated. Reconnect the transducers and connec­tors as described above. All transducers are mounted on Schrader fittings. Therefore, it is NOT necessary to remove system refrigerant charge. Use a catch pan when removing the oil pressure transducer for calibration as oil will leak out through the Schrader fitting.
TROUBLESHOOTING — If transducer is suspected of being faulty, first check supply voltage to transducer. Supply voltage should be 5 vdc ± .2 v. If supply voltage is correct, compare pressure reading displayed on keypad and display module against pressure shown on a calibrated pressure gage. If the 2 pressure readings are not reasonably close, replace pressure transducer.
61
Page 62
Table 42A — Thermistor Temperatures (°F) vs Resistance/Voltage Drop
(NOTE: These values do NOT Apply to the Motor Temperature Thermistors)
TEMP
(F)
–25 4.821 98,010 59 3.437 7,868 143 1.250 1,190 –24 4.818 94,707 60 3.409 7,665 144 1.230 1,165 –23 4.814 91,522 61 3.382 7,468 145 1.211 1,141 –22 4.806 88,449 62 3.353 7,277 146 1.192 1,118 –21 4.800 85,486 63 3.323 7,091 147 1.173 1,095 –20 4.793 82,627 64 3.295 6,911 148 1.155 1,072 –19 4.786 79,871 65 3.267 6,735 149 1.136 1,050 –18 4.779 77,212 66 3.238 6,564 150 1.118 1,029 –17 4.772 74,648 67 3.210 6,399 151 1.100 1,007 –16 4.764 72,175 68 3.181 6,238 152 1.082 986 –15 4.757 69,790 69 3.152 6,081 153 1.064 965 –14 4.749 67,490 70 3.123 5,929 154 1.047 945 –13 4.740 65,272 71 3.093 5,781 155 1.029 925 –12 4.734 63,133 72 3.064 5,637 156 1.012 906 –11 4.724 61,070 73 3.034 5,497 157 0.995 887 –10 4.715 59,081 74 3.005 5,361 158 0.978 868
–9 4.705 57,162 75 2.977 5,229 159 0.962 850 –8 4.696 55,311 76 2.947 5,101 160 0.945 832 –7 4.688 53,526 77 2.917 4,976 161 0.929 815 –6 4.676 51,804 78 2.884 4,855 162 0.914 798 –5 4.666 50,143 79 2.857 4,737 163 0.898 782 –4 4.657 48,541 80 2.827 4,622 164 0.883 765 –3 4.648 46,996 81 2.797 4,511 165 0.868 750 –2 4.636 45,505 82 2.766 4,403 166 0.853 734 –1 4.624 44,066 83 2.738 4,298 167 0.838 719
0 4.613 42,679 84 2.708 4,196 168 0.824 705 1 4.602 41,339 85 2.679 4,096 169 0.810 690 2 4.592 40,047 86 2.650 4,000 170 0.797 677 3 4.579 38,800 87 2.622 3,906 171 0.783 663 4 4.567 37,596 88 2.593 3,814 172 0.770 650 5 4.554 36,435 89 2.563 3,726 173 0.758 638 6 4.540 35,313 90 2.533 3,640 174 0.745 626 7 4.527 34,231 91 2.505 3,556 175 0.734 614 8 4.514 33,185 92 2.476 3,474 176 0.722 602
9 4.501 32,176 93 2.447 3,395 177 0.710 591 10 4.487 31,202 94 2.417 3,318 178 0.700 581 11 4.472 30,260 95 2.388 3,243 179 0.689 570 12 4.457 29,351 96 2.360 3,170 180 0.678 561 13 4.442 28,473 97 2.332 3,099 181 0.668 551 14 4.427 27,624 98 2.305 3,031 182 0.659 542 15 4.413 26,804 99 2.277 2,964 183 0.649 533 16 4.397 26,011 100 2.251 2,898 184 0.640 524 17 4.381 25,245 101 2.217 2,835 185 0.632 516 18 4.366 24,505 102 2.189 2,773 186 0.623 508 19 4.348 23,789 103 2.162 2,713 187 0.615 501 20 4.330 23,096 104 2.136 2,655 188 0.607 494 21 4.313 22,427 105 2.107 2,597 189 0.600 487 22 4.295 21,779 106 2.080 2,542 190 0.592 480 23 4.278 21,153 107 2.053 2,488 191 0.585 473 24 4.258 20,547 108 2.028 2,436 192 0.579 467 25 4.241 19,960 109 2.001 2,385 193 0.572 461 26 4.223 19,393 110 1.973 2,335 194 0.566 456 27 4.202 18,843 111 1.946 2,286 195 0.560 450 28 4.184 18,311 112 1.919 2,239 196 0.554 445 29 4.165 17,796 113 1.897 2,192 197 0.548 439 30 4.145 17,297 114 1.870 2,147 198 0.542 434 31 4.125 16,814 115 1.846 2,103 199 0.537 429 32 4.103 16,346 116 1.822 2,060 200 0.531 424 33 4.082 15,892 117 1.792 2,018 201 0.526 419 34 4.059 15,453 118 1.771 1,977 202 0.520 415 35 4.037 15,027 119 1.748 1,937 203 0.515 410 36 4.017 14,614 120 1.724 1,898 204 0.510 405 37 3.994 14,214 121 1.702 1,860 205 0.505 401 38 3.968 13,826 122 1.676 1,822 206 0.499 396 39 3.948 13,449 123 1.653 1,786 207 0.494 391 40 3.927 13,084 124 1.630 1,750 208 0.488 386 41 3.902 12,730 125 1.607 1,715 209 0.483 382 42 3.878 12,387 126 1.585 1,680 210 0.477 377 43 3.854 12,053 127 1.562 1,647 211 0.471 372 44 3.828 11,730 128 1.538 1,614 212 0.465 367 45 3.805 11,416 129 1.517 1,582 213 0.459 361 46 3.781 11,112 130 1.496 1,550 214 0.453 356 47 3.757 10,816 131 1.474 1,519 215 0.446 350 48 3.729 10,529 132 1.453 1,489 216 0.439 344 49 3.705 10,250 133 1.431 1,459 217 0.432 338 50 3.679 9,979 134 1.408 1,430 218 0.425 332 51 3.653 9,717 135 1.389 1,401 219 0.417 325 52 3.627 9,461 136 1.369 1,373 220 0.409 318 53 3.600 9,213 137 1.348 1,345 221 0.401 311 54 3.575 8,973 138 1.327 1,318 222 0.393 304 55 3.547 8,739 139 1.308 1,291 223 0.384 297 56 3.520 8,511 140 1.291 1,265 224 0.375 289 57 3.493 8,291 141 1.289 1,240 225 0.366 282 58 3.464 8,076 142 1.269 1,214
VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
TEMP
(F)
VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
TEMP
(F)
VOLTAG E
DROP
(V)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
62
Page 63
Table 42B — Thermistor Temperatures (°C) vs Resistance/Voltage Drop
(NOTE: These values do NOT Apply to the Motor Temperature Thermistors)
TEMP
(C)
–40 4.896 168,230 10 3.680 9,949 60 1.291 1,244 –39 4.889 157,440 11 3.633 9,485 61 1.258 1,200 –38 4.882 147,410 12 3.585 9,044 62 1.225 1,158 –37 4.874 138,090 13 3.537 8,627 63 1.192 1,118 –36 4.866 129,410 14 3.487 8,231 64 1.160 1,079 –35 4.857 121,330 15 3.438 7,855 65 1.129 1,041 –34 4.848 113,810 16 3.387 7,499 66 1.099 1,006 –33 4.838 106,880 17 3.337 7,161 67 1.069 971 –32 4.828 100,260 18 3.285 6,840 68 1.040 938 –31 4.817 94,165 19 3.234 6,536 69 1.012 906 –30 4.806 88,480 20 3.181 6,246 70 0.984 876 –29 4.794 83,170 21 3.129 5,971 71 0.949 836 –28 4.782 78,125 22 3.076 5,710 72 0.920 805 –27 4.769 73,580 23 3.023 5,461 73 0.892 775 –26 4.755 69,250 24 2.970 5,225 74 0.865 747 –25 4.740 65,205 25 2.917 5,000 75 0.838 719 –24 4.725 61,420 26 2.864 4,786 76 0.813 693 –23 4.710 57,875 27 2.810 4,583 77 0.789 669 –22 4.693 54,555 28 2.757 4,389 78 0.765 645 –21 4.676 51,450 29 2.704 4,204 79 0.743 623 –20 4.657 48,536 30 2.651 4,028 80 0.722 602 –19 4.639 45,807 31 2.598 3,861 81 0.702 583 –18 4.619 43,247 32 2.545 3,701 82 0.683 564 –17 4.598 40,845 33 2.493 3,549 83 0.665 547 –16 4.577 38,592 34 2.441 3,404 84 0.648 531 –15 4.554 38,476 35 2.389 3,266 85 0.632 516 –14 4.531 34,489 36 2.337 3,134 86 0.617 502 –13 4.507 32,621 37 2.286 3,008 87 0.603 489 –12 4.482 30,866 38 2.236 2,888 88 0.590 477 –11 4.456 29,216 39 2.186 2,773 89 0.577 466 –10 4.428 27,633 40 2.137 2,663 90 0.566 456
–9 4.400 26,202 41 2.087 2,559 91 0.555 446 –8 4.371 24,827 42 2.039 2,459 92 0.545 436 –7 4.341 23,532 43 1.991 2,363 93 0.535 427 –6 4.310 22,313 44 1.944 2,272 94 0.525 419 –5 4.278 21,163 45 1.898 2,184 95 0.515 410 –4 4.245 20,079 46 1.852 2,101 96 0.506 402 –3 4.211 19,058 47 1.807 2,021 97 0.496 393 –2 4.176 18,094 48 1.763 1,944 98 0.486 385 –1 4.140 17,184 49 1.719 1,871 99 0.476 376
0 4.103 16,325 50 1.677 1,801 100 0.466 367 1 4.065 15,515 51 1.635 1,734 101 0.454 357 2 4.026 14,749 52 1.594 1,670 102 0.442 346 3 3.986 14,026 53 1.553 1,609 103 0.429 335 4 3.945 13,342 54 1.513 1,550 104 0.416 324 5 3.903 12,696 55 1.474 1,493 105 0.401 312 6 3.860 12,085 56 1.436 1,439 106 0.386 299 7 3.816 11,506 57 1.399 1,387 107 0.370 285 8 3.771 10,959 58 1.363 1,337 9 3.726 10,441 59 1.327 1,290
VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
TEMP
(C)
VOLTAGE
DROP
(V)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
TEMP
(C)
VOLTAG E
DROP
(V)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
THERMISTOR JACKETED CABLE SENSOR TUBE BEND SLIGHTLY BEFORE WELL INSERTION
4 in.
3/16 in.
Fig. 22 — Thermistor Replacement (T1, T2, T5, or T6)
PLUG END
PACKING NUT
FERRULE
MEASURE TO TOP OF WELD COUPLING FOR PROPER INSERTION (SEE TABLE 44)
COOLER
Fig. 23 — Thermistor (Liquid Level Sensor) Replacement
THERMISTOR WELL
X
63
Page 64
Table 43 Thermistor Temperatures vs
Resistance, Motor Temperature Thermistors
TEMP
(F)
–22 –30 88,480.0 –13 –25 65,205.0
–4 –20 48,536.0
5 –15 36,476.0 14 –10 27,663.0 23 –5 21,163.0 32 0 16,325.0 41 5 12,696.0 50 10 9,949.5 59 15 7,855.5 68 20 6,246.0 77 25 5,000.0 86 30 4,028.4 95 35 3,265.7
104 40 2,663.2 113 45 2,184.2 122 50 1,801.2 131 55 1,493.1 140 60 1,243.9 149 65 1,041.4 158 70 875.8 167 75 739.7 176 80 627.6 185 85 534.9 194 90 457.7 203 95 393.3 212 100 339.3 221 105 293.8 230 110 255.3 239 115 222.6 248 120 194.8
NOTE: Motor temperature thermistor values must be verified using resistance.
Voltage drop cannot be used.
TEMP
(C)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
Table 44 — Thermistor
(Liquid Level Sensor) Depth
UNIT MODEL
NUMBER
30GX080-090 6.00 (152.4)
30GX105-115 4.25 (108.0)
30GX125-136 5.56 (141.2)
30GX150,151 6.00 (152.4)
30GX160,161 4.25 (108.0)
30GX175,176 4.25 (108.0)
30GX205-226 3.94 (100.0)
30GX250-265 4.82 (122.4)
30GX281-350 5.00 (127.0)
30HXA,C076-086 5.13 (130.3)
30HXA,C096 6.00 (152.4)
30HXA,C106 4.25 (108.0)
30HXA,C116-126 5.13 (130.3)
30HXA,C136-146 6.00 (152.4)
30HXA,C161-171 4.25 (108.0)
30HXA,C186 5.56 (141.2)
30HXA,C206 3.94 (100.0)
30HXA,C246-271 4.82 (122.4)
THERMISTOR DEPTH
“X”-in. (mm)
Table 45 — Calibrating Pressure Transducers
(Pressure Gage Installed)
KEYPAD ENTRY
ENTER
Safety Devices —
DISPLAY
RESPONSE
CALIBRATION OFFSET
CIRCUIT A PRESSURE
Discharge Pressure
84.2 PSI Discharge Pressure
85.0 PSI
COMMENTS
Current reading is displayed.
Enter gauge pressure reading to nearest tenth. Control will allow offset of up to 6 psig. Transducer calibration is now complete.
The 30GX/HX chillers contain many safety devices and protection logic built into the electronic control. Following is a description of the major safeties.
COMPRESSOR PROTECTION Motor Overload
— The compressor protection modules (CPM) protect each compressor against overcurrent. Do not bypass the current transducers or make any changes to the factory-installed and configured 8 pin headers. The configura­tion of these headers defines the Must Trip Amps (MTA) at which the CPM will turn the compressors off. Determine the cause for trouble and correct the problem before resetting the CPM. See Appendix A for setting of MTAs and configuration headers.
Each CPM board also reads the status of each compressor’s high-pressure switch. All compressors have factory-installed high-pressure switches. For 30GX units, the switch is set to trip at 303 ± 7 psig (2089 ± 48 kPa). The setting for 30HXA uni ts is 275 ± 7 psig (1896 ± 48 kPa) and for 30HXC units the setting is 191 ± 7 psig (1317 ± 48 kPa). If the switch opens during op­eration, the compressor will be shut down. The CPM will reset automatically when the switch closes , however, a manual reset is required to restart the compressor.
OIL SEPARATOR HEATERS (30GX) — Each oil separator circuit has a heater mounted on the underside of the vessel. The heater is energized with control circuit powe r. Oil heaters are energized when the discharge gas temperature falls below 105 F (40.6 C). The heaters are deenergized when the dis­charge gas temperature rises above 110 F (43.3 C). The control will allow the chiller to attempt to start with the heaters ener­gized and will keep the heaters on, even when running, until the discharge gas temperature reaches 110 F (43.3 C). Note that the oil heaters are deenergized if the oil level switch is open.
COOLER PROTECTION Low Water Temperature
— Microprocessor is programmed
to shut the chiller down if the leaving fluid temperature drops below 34 F (1.1 C) for water or more than 8° F (4.4° C) below set point for brine units. When the fluid temperature rises 6° F (3.3° C) above the leaving fluid set point, the safety resets and the chiller restarts. Reset is automatic as long as this is the first occurrence of the day.
IMPORTANT: If the unit is installed in an area where
ambient temperatures fall below 32 F (0° C), cooler
heaters and inhibited ethylene glycol or other suitable
solution must be used in the chilled fluid circuit.
Relief Devices —
Fusible plugs are located in each cir­cuit (30GX only) between the condenser and the liquid line shutoff valve.
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES — Valves are installed in each circuit and are located on all coolers. One relief valve is also installed on each 30HXC condenser. Both circuits’ oil separa­tors on 30GX and 30HXA units have factory-installed relief valves as well. These valves are designed to relieve if an abnormal pressure condition arises. Relief valves on all coolers and 30HXC condensers relieve at 220 psi (1517 kPa). Relief valves on 30GX and 30HXA oil separators relieve at 320 psi (2206 kPa). All 30HXA, HXC units with factory-installed suc­tion service valves also have a relief valv e in e ach compress or discharge line. These valves are designed to relieve at 350 psig (2413 kPa). These valves should not be capped. If a valve relieves, it should be replaced. If the valve is not replaced, it may relieve at a lower pressure, or leak due to trapped dirt from the system which may prevent resealing.
Pressure relief valves located on cooler and condenser shells and 30HXA oil separator shells have for relief. The 30GX oil separators have
3
/4-in. NPT connections
1
/2-in. male flare con­nections. Some local building codes require that relieved gases be removed. This connection allows conformance to this requirement.
64
Page 65
COMPRESSOR A2
(206-271 ONLY)
3
COMPRESSOR A1
3
2
COMPRESSOR B1
4
3
4
COOLER
2
1
1
DISCHARGE PRESSURE
2
SUCTION PRESSURE
COMP A2
(205-265 ONLY)
3
4
1
1
DISCHARGE PRESSURE
2
SUCTION PRESSURE
1
3
OIL PRESSURE
4
ECONOMIZER PRESSURE (LOCATED IN MOTOR COOLING LINE)
Fig. 24A — 30HX Pressure Transducer Locations
2
COMP A1
COMP B2
(281-350 ONLY)
1
3
OIL PRESSURE
4
ECONOMIZER PRESSURE (LOCATED IN MOTOR COOLING LINE)
2
COMP B1
33 3
4
Fig. 24B — 30GX Pressure Transducer Locations
CONDENSER (30HXC MODEL) OIL SEPARATOR (30HXA MODEL)
COOLER
OIL SEPARATORS (ONE VESSEL ON 30GX080-150 UNITS, TWO SEPARATE ON 30GX151-350 UNITS)
Control Modules
Turn controller power off before servicing controls. This ensures safety and prevents damage to controller.
PROCESSOR MODULE (PSIO-1), COMPRESSOR PRO­TECTION MODULE (CPM), HIGH-VOLTAGE RELAY MODULE (DSIO-HV), AND EXV DRIVER MODULE (DSIO-EXV), 12/6 MODULE (PSIO-2) — The PSIO and DSIO modules all perform continuous diagnostic evaluations of the condition of the hardware. Proper operation of these modules is indicated by LEDs on the front surface of the DSIOs, and on the top horizontal surface of the PSIOs.
RED LED — Blinking continuously at a 1 to 2 second rate indicates proper operation. Lighted continuously indicates a problem requiring replacement of module. Off continuously indicates power should be checked. If there is no input power, check fuses. If fuse is bad, check for shorted secondary of transformer, tripped circuit breaker or bad module. On the PSIO module, if the light is blinking at a rate of twice per sec­ond, the module should be replaced.
GREEN LED — On a PSIO module, this is the green LED closest to COMM connectors. The other green LED on mod­ule indicates external communications, when used. Green LED should always be blinking when power is on. It indicates mod­ules are communicating properly. If green LED is not blinking,
check red LED. If red LED is normal, check module address switches. Correct addresses are as follows:
PSIO-1 (Processor Module) — 01 CPM-1 (Protection Module) — 20 CPM-2 (Protection Module) — 32 DSIO (EXV Driver Module) — 50 DSIO-HV (Relay Module) — 62 PSIO-2 (12/6 I/O Module) — 74
The first number of the address for a DSIO module should
be set on the switch closest to the silver mounting plate.
If all modules indicate communication failure, check COMM plug on PSIO-1 module for proper seating. If a good connection is assured and condition persists, replace PSIO-1 module.
If only a DSIO module indicates communication failure, check COMM plug on that module for proper seating. If a good connection is assured and the condition persists, replace the DSIO module.
All system opera ting intell igence rests in the PSIO-1 mo d­ule, the module that controls unit. This module monitors condi­tions through input and output ports and through DSIO mod­ules (high-voltage relay module and EXV driver module).
The machine operator communicates with mic roprocessor through keypad and display module. Communication between PSIO and other modules is accomplished by a 3-wire sensor bus. These 3 wires run in parallel from module to module.
65
Page 66
On sensor bus terminal strips, terminal 1 of PSIO module is connected to terminal 1 of each of the other modules. Termi­nals 2 and 3 are connected in the same manner. See Fig. 25. If a terminal 2 wire is connected to terminal 1, system does not work.
In the 30GX control box, the processor module (PSIO-1), DSIO-HV, and H SIO are all powere d from a common 21 va c power source (PSIO-1 and HSIO are powered from 24 vac source on 30HX units) which connects to terminals 1 and 2 of the power connector on each module. A separate source of 21 vac power is used to power the PSIO-2 module and liquid level sensor heaters. A separate 12.5 vdc power source is used for the DSIO-EXV module through terminals 1 and 2 on the power connector. The CPM modules are connected to 24 vac power sources. Refer to Table 46 for control troubleshooting information.
CONTROL MODULE BATTERY REPLACEMENT — The PSIO-1 contains software that is stored in the RAM (Random Access Memory). For this reason, a battery is required to main­tain power and retain the software in the control module memory.
A 3.6 volt AA lithium battery (part no. CEC0120803-01) is required for all PSIO-1 modules. The nominal voltage is 3.6 to
3.7 volts, which is maintained throughout the life of the battery. The power circuitry is designed so that the battery is always in the circuit. The battery life will diminish faster if the module is not powered. Battery life also depends on the steady state volt­age of the unit and the ambient temperature of the module. Bat­tery life expectancy of a 3.6 volt, AA lithium battery is about 4 years. Voltage drops rapidly at the end of battery life.
A part of a yearly maintenance schedule, check the voltage level of the battery on each PSIO-1 module. If the battery reads
3.5 volts or less, the battery is approaching the end of its usage life and should be replaced. The voltage should be measured with the battery in place inside the module. With the control voltage on, check the voltage by placing one test lead on each pole of the battery.
Power must be applied to PSIO-1 module while replacing battery or software loss will occur.
in the field. The system elements are connected to the commu­nication bus in a daisy chain arrangement as shown in Fig. 25. The positive pin of each system element communication con­nector must be wired to the positive pins of the system ele­ments on either side of it. This is also required for the negative and signal ground pins of each system element. Wiring con­nections for CCN should be made at the COMM1 plug on the PSIO-1 module. Consult the CCN Contractor’s Manual for further information.
NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (Amer­ican Wire Gage) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl, Teflon, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl, or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of –20 C to 60 C is required. Wire manufactured by Alpha (2413 or 5463), American (A22503), Belden (8772), or Columbia (02525) meets the above mentioned requirements.
It is important when connecting to a CCN communication bus that a color coding scheme be used for the entire network to simplify the installation. It is recommended that red be used for the signal positive, black for the signal negative, and white for the signal ground. Use a similar scheme for cables contain­ing different colored wires.
At each system element, the shields of its communicati on bus cables must be tied together. If the communication bus is entirely within one building, the resulting continuous shield must be connected to a ground at one point only. If the commu­nication bus cable exits from one building and enters another, the shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning sup­pressor in each building where the cable enters or exits the building (one point per building only). To connect the unit to the network:
1. Turn of f power to the control box.
2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white
(ground), and black (–) conductors. (Substitute appropriate colors for different colored cables.)
3. Remove the 4-pin female plug from the PSIO-1 COMM1
plug and connect the red wire to terminal 1 of the plug, the white wire to terminal 2, and the black wire to terminal 3.
4. Insert the plug back into the COMM1 plug.
As part of unit scheduled maintenance, replace the battery
every 4 years regardless of voltage reading.
Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) Interface —
The 30GX,HX chiller units can be connected to the CCN if desired. The communication bus wiring is a shielded, 3-conductor cable with drain wire and is supplied and installed
1
2
3
PSIO-1-J8
1
2
3
DSIO-HV-J2
1
2
3
Fig. 25 — Sensor Bus Wiring (Communications)
IMPORTANT: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent
some routines from running and may prevent the unit
from starting. If abnormal conditions occur, unplug the
connector. If conditions return to normal, check the
CCN connector and cable. Run new cable if necessary.
A short in one section of the bus can cause problems
with all sys te m el eme nt s on the b us.
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
CPM-2CPM-1HSIO-IIPSIO-2-J8DSIO-EXV-J2
66
Page 67
Table 46 — Compressor Control Troubleshooting
SYMPTOMS CA USE REMEDY
COMPRESSOR DOES NOT RUN
COMPRESSOR CYCLES OFF ON LOW PRESSURE
COMPRESSOR SHUTS DOWN ON HIGH PRESSURE CONTROL
UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY
SYSTEM NOISES
COMPRESSOR LOSES OIL HOT LIQUID LINE
FROSTED LIQUID LINE COMPRESSOR LOADERS
NOT WORKING PROPERLY
*30GX251, 265 sizes have two Circuit A discharge and liquid valves.
Power line open Control fuse open High-Pressure Switch (HPS) tripped
Tripped motor overload Loose terminal connection Improperly wired controls Low line voltage
Compressor motor defective Seized compressor
Pre-lubrication not successful Loss of charge
Bad transducer Low refrigerant charge Failed expansion device
High-pressure switch erratic in action Compressor discharge valve partially closed Condenser fan(s) not operating (air cooled units) Condenser coil plugged or dirty (air cooled units) Condenser water valve not operating (water cooled units) Circuit overcharged Liquid valve closed*
Low refrigerant charge Control contacts fused Partially plugged or plugged expansion valve or filter drier Defective insulation Service load exceeding design capacity Inefficient compressor
Piping vibration Expansion valve hissing
Compressor noisy
Leak in system Mechanical damage to rotors
Shortage of refrigerant due to leak Repair leak and recharge. Shutoff valve partially closed or restricted Open valve or remove restriction. Burned out coil
Defective capacity control valve Miswired solenoid
Check main disconnect. Check control circuit for ground or short. Replace fuse. Move LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch to OFF position then back to LOCAL or REMOTE position. Check the controls. Find cause of trip. Reset overload. Check connections. Check wiring and rewire. Check line voltage. Determine location of voltage drop and remedy deficiency. Check motor winding for open or short. Replace compressor if necessary. Replace compressor. Check oil pump operation, oil pressure transducer, verify oil level/flow switch operation.
Repair leak and recharge. Replace transducer. Add refrigerant. Repair/replace as needed.
Replace switch. Open valve or replace if defective. Check wiring. Repair or replace motor(s) if defective. Clean coil. Check wiring. Repair or replace valve if defective.
Clean condenser. Open valve or replace if defective.
Add refrigerant. Replace control. Clean or replace.
Replace or repair. Keep doors and windows closed. Check loader solenoid valves. Replace if necessary.
Support piping as required. Add refrigerant. Check for plugged liquid line filter drier. Replace compressor (worn bearings). Check for loose compressor bolts securing compressor to cooler.
Find and repair leak. Replace compressor.
Replace coil. Replace valve. Rewire correctly.
67
Page 68
PROCESSOR MODULE (PSIO-1) Inputs
— Each input channel has 3 terminals; only 2 of the ter­minals are used. Application of machine determines which ter­minals are used. Always refer to the individual unit wiring for terminal numbers.
Outputs
— Output is 20 vdc or 4 to 20 mA. There are 3 termi­nals, only 2 of which are used, depending on the application. Refer to unit the wiring diagram.
NOTE: The 12/6 Input/Output module (PSIO-2) has identical input and output configurations as the PSIO-1. There is NO operating software in the PSIO-2 module.
HIGH VOLTAGE RELAY MODULE (DSIO-HV) Inputs
— Inputs on strip J3 are discrete inputs (ON/OFF). When 24-vac power is applied across the 2 terminals in a chan­nel it reads the input as an On signal. Zero volts input is read as an Off signal.
Outputs
— Terminal strips J4 and J5 are internal relays whose coils are signaled to be turned on and off by the microproces­sor (PSIO-1). Th e relays switch the c ircuit to which they are connected. No power is supplied to these connections by DSIO-HV module.
Replacing Defective Processor Module —
The PSIO-1 module replacement part numbers are shown in T a ble 47. The unit model and s erial numbers are printed on the unit nameplate located on an exterior corner post (30GX) or the corner of the control box (30HX). The proper software and unit configuration data is factory installed by Carrier in the replace­ment module. Therefore, when ordering a replacement proces­sor module (PSIO-1), specify the replacement part number, full unit model number, and serial number. The replacement mod­ules are downloaded with default configuration values that must be verified for proper operation. Using Table 25, enter
from the HSIO and correct any of the configuration codes that do not match those in T able 25 for the corresponding chiller size. If these numbers are not provided, the replacement module will be downloaded with the base software. The base software settings must be reconfigured by the installer in the field.
Verify the existing PSIO-1 module is defective by using the
procedure described in the Control Modules section.
Refer to Start-Up Checklist for 30GX,HX Liquid Chillers (completed at time of original start-up) found in the job folder. This information is needed later in this procedure. If the check­list does not exist, fill out the current factory and service con­figuration codes ( ) sections on a new check-list. Tailor the various options and configurations as needed for this partic­ular installation.
Electrical shock can cause personal injury. Disconnect all electrical power before servicing.
1. Check that all power to unit is off. Carefully disconnect all wires from defective module by unplugging the 6 connec­tors. It is not necessary to remove any of the individual wires from the connectors. Remove the screws securing the green ground wire and communication drain wire. Save the screws.
2. Remove the defective PSIO-1 module by removing its mounting screws with a Phillips screwdriver, and remov­ing the module from the control box. Save the screws for later use.
3. Use a small screwd r iv e r to set the addr ess switches S1 a n d S2 on the new PSIO module to exactly match the settings on the defective module.
4. Package the defective module in the carton of the new module for return to Carrier.
5. Mount the new module in the unit control box using a Phillips screwdriver and the screws saved in Step 2.
6. Reinstall all 6 wire connectors, the green ground wire, and the communications drain wire.
7. Carefully check all wiring connections before restoring power.
8. Verify the LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch is in the OFF position.
9. Restore control power. Verify the red and green lights on top of the PSIO-1 and on front of each DSIO module respond as described in Control Modules section. The keypad and display module should also begin its rotating display. Using the keypad and display module, press to
verify that the software version number matches the ER (engineering requirement) number shown on the PSIO-1 label.
10. Press , scroll down one level at a time, and che ck the 3 factory and 2 service configuration codes as recorded on checklist. These codes must exactly match the codes stored in the previous PSIO-1 module for proper unit oper­ation. These should already be downloaded if the proper information was supplied when ordering the replacement module. If the codes do not match, the codes must be entered by the procedure described in the factory service code section of T able 25.
11. Once all codes have been verified, and all configurations, set points, and schedules re-entered, return the LOCAL/ OFF/REMOTE switch to its previous position.
Winter Shutdown Preparation —
At the end of each cooling season the fluid should be drained from the sys­tem. However, due to the cooler circuiting, some fluid will remain in the cooler after draining. To prevent freeze-up dam­age to the cooler tubes perform the following procedure.
1. If accessory cooler heaters have been installed, deenergize
the heaters to prevent damage and possible safety hazards when draining, or when there is no liquid in the system. Remove Fuse 1 to deenergize the heaters. Drain the fluid from the system.
2. Isolate the cooler from the rest of the system with water shut
off valves.
3. Fill the cooler with an appropriate amount of inhibi ted ethyl-
ene glycol solution (or other suitable corrosion-inhibitive antifreeze) for 15° F (8.3° C) below the expecte d low ambi­ent conditions.
4. Leave the cooler filled with the antifreeze solution for the
winter, or drain if desired. Be sure to deenergize heaters (if installed) as explained in Step 1 to prevent damage. Use an approved method of disposal when removing the antifreeze solution.
Table 47 — Replacement Processor
Module Part Numbers
UNIT REPLACEMENT MODULE 30GX080-150,160 30GX151,161,175 30GX176 30GX205-265 30GX281-350 30HX076-186 30HX206-271
30GX502892 30GX502891 30GX502890 30GX502842 30GX503172 30HX501216 30HX501215
68
Page 69
PRE-START-UP PROCEDURE
IMPORTANT: Before beginning Pre-Start-Up or Start­Up, complete the Start-Up Checklist for the 30GX,HX Liquid Chillers on pages CL-1 to CL-8. This Checklist assures proper start-up of the chiller, and provides a record of unit condition, application requirements, sys­tem information and operation at initial start-up. The checklist should be removed from the manual and kept with the job file for future reference.
IMPORTAN T: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO START THE CHILLER UNTIL THE FOLLOWING CHECKS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED.
DO NOT make any changes to the factory-installed com­pressor power wiring in the control box or at the compres­sor junction box. Doing so will cause permanent damage to the compressor and will require compressor replacement. Proper phasing has already been checked at the factory.
System Check
1. Check all auxiliary components such as the chilled fluid circulating pump, air-handling equipment, or other equip­ment to which the chiller supplies liquid. Consult the man­ufacturer’s instructions. If the unit has field-installed accessories, be sure all are properly installed and wired correctly. Refer to the unit wiring diagrams.
2. Check the cooler flow switch for proper configuration and operation ( from HSIO). E nsure the sw itch closes when the pump is on and opens when the pump is turned off. A flow switch must be installed.
3. Open the discharge and liquid valves in each circuit. The discharge shutoff valves are in-line ball type and are open when parallel with the refrigerant flow.
4. If factory-installed suction service valves are installed, open the suction service valves in each circuit. Service valve is located below the compressor in the cooler suction connection flange. To operate the valve, first remove the cap. Use a back-up wrench on the packing gland to prevent loosening while removing cap. Loosen the jam nut. Turn the stem counterclockwise to open. Tighten the jam nut.
5. Open the oil shutoff valves located by the oil pre-filter. Open bubbler tube valve on 30HX machines equipped with economizers.
6. Check the tightness of all electrical connections. Check incoming power supply for proper nameplate voltage.
7. Check to ensure the unit is level per the installation instructions.
8. Check all field configuration data and set points.
9. Enter correct date, time, and operating schedule(s).
10. Verify operation of solenoids, pumps, valves, compressors, fans, etc. as listed in the Start-Up Checklist.
11. Open condenser water valves. Check condenser water pump for proper operation (30HX).
START-UP AND OPERATION
Actual Start-Up —
under supervision of a qualified refrigeration mechanic and qualified Carrier Comfort Network personnel.
1. Set leaving fluid temperature. No cooling range adjustment
is necessary .
2. Start chilled fluid pump and condenser pump (30HXC) if
not controlled by unit.
3. Switch LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch to LOCAL or
REMOTE.
4. Provided there is a load on the chiller, allow the machine to
operate and confirm that everything is functioning properly. Verify that the leaving fluid temperature agrees with the cooling set point (1 or 2), or if reset is being used, the modi­fied set point. Chiller is controlling to the Control Point dis­played under .
Operating Sequence —
switching the LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch to either LOCAL or REMOTE. If cooler pump control is enabled, the cooler pump is started. If condenser pump control (30HXC) is enabled, the condenser pump is started. On a command for cooling, the oil pump is turned on to start the pre-lubrication process. After 20 seconds, the oil solenoid is opened and the control reads the oil pressure from the transducer and deter­mines if sufficient pressure has been built up. If there is not sufficient pressure, an alarm is generated after the second attempt and the compressor is not started.
Upon building pressure, the compressor is allowed to start. For across-the-line (XL) start chillers, the compressor starts and comes up to full speed within 1 to 3 seconds. For Wye­Delta start chillers, contactors 1M and S (starter contactor as­sembly) are closed and the compressor is started in a Wye con­figuration. This method reduces the locked rotor current re­quirements by approximately 60% while maintaining enough torque to bring the compressor up to full speed.
After 5 seconds, the CPM module switches out contactor S and brings in contactor 2M, which runs the motor in a Delta configuration (same configuration in which XL units run). The oil pump will shut off within 10 seconds after the compres sor is started. Once the compressor is successfully running, the con­trol loads the compressor and adds additional stages of capacity as needed to satisfy the leaving fluid set point. Head pressure is controlled by fan cycling (30GX) or can be controlled with a field installed accessory Motormaster field installed condenser water valves (30HX).
Actual start-up should be done only
The chiller is started by
®
III controller (30GX) or
69
Page 70
FIELD WIRING
Field wiring is shown in Fig. 26-38.
NEC FUSED DISCONNECT
FIELD CONTROL POWER SUPPLY
1
2
115 V CONTROL CIRCUITS USE 30 AMP MAXIMUM FROM SEPARATE POWER SUPPLY
230 V CONTROL CIRCUITS USE 15 AMP MAXIMUM FROM SEPARATE POWER SUPPLY
LEGEND FOR FIG. 26-38
ALM — C— CFC — CPR — CWP — DSIO — EQUIP — EXV — FU — GFI-CO — GND — NEC — PL — PSIO — RB — TB —
Alarm Contactor Condenser Fan Contactor Condenser Pump Relay Chilled Water Pump High Voltage Relay Module Equipment Electronic Expansion Valve Fuse Ground Fault Interrupter Convenience Outlet Ground National Electrical Code Plug Processor Sensor Input/Output Module Relay Board Terminal Block Field-Wired Factory Wired
GND
TB4
Fig. 26 — Power Supply Wiring
RELAY BOARD 1
K6
Fig. 27 — Remote Alarm Relay Accessory Wiring; 30HXA,C
EQUIP GND
TB2
T1
T2
BLK
BLK
TB2
2
3
ALM
MAX. LOAD ALLOWED FOR THE ALARM RELAY IS 125 VA SEALED, 1250 VA INRUSH AT 115 OR 230 VOLT. MIN. LOAD 10 VA SEALED.
FIELD SUPPLIED
SEPARATE 115 OR 230 V FIELD POWER SUPPLY
RELAY BOARD 2
T4
K3
T3
MAX. LOAD ALLOWED FOR THE ALARM RELAY IS 125 VA SEALED, 1250 VA INRUSH AT 115 OR 230 VOLT. MIN. LOAD 10 VA SEALED.
Fig. 28 — Remote Alarm Relay Accessory Wiring; 30GX
EQUIP GND
ALM
FIELD SUPPLIED
70
SEPARATE 115 OR 230 V FIELD POWER SUPPLY
Page 71
RELAY BOARD 1
K3
MAX. LOAD ALLOWED FOR THE CWP RELAY IS 125 VA SEALED, 1250 VA INRUSH AT 115 OR 230 VOLT. MIN. LOAD 10 VA SEALED.
Fig. 29 — Chilled Water Pump Relay Wiring; 30HXA,C
T4
T3
EQUIP GND
TB2
BLK
BLK
4
5
TB2
ACCESSORY ONLY
EQUIP GND
C1
CWP
C2
SEPARATE 115 OR 230 V FIELD POWER SUPPLY
RELAY BOARD 1
K3
MAX. LOAD ALLOWED FOR THE CWP RELAY IS 125 VA SEALED, 1250 VA INRUSH AT 115 OR 230 VOLT. MIN. LOAD 10 VA SEALED.
Fig. 30 — Chilled Water Pump Relay Wiring; 30GX
T4
T3
CWP
ACCESSORY ONLY
SEPARATE 115 OR 230 V FIELD POWER SUPPLY
C2C1
71
Page 72
GFI-CO
TEST
RESET
TB4
1
BLU
15 AMPS
FU1
ACCESSORY
BLK
Fig. 31 — Ground Fault Interrupter-Convenience Outlet Accessory Wiring
230V CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING 115V CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING
GRN/YEL
WHT
SILVER SCREWSBRASS SCREWS
TB4
2
BLU
BLU OR BRN
CHANNEL 11
9
CHANNEL 12
12
YEL
11 10
RED
BLK
WHT
RED
WHT
BLU OR BRN
BLU
YEL
BLK
BLK OR RED
BLK OR RED
Fig. 32 — Oil Pump Motor Junction Box Wiring
PNK
7
GRA
PNK
PL5-6
GRA
8
PL5-5
MINIMUM LOAD CONTROL A PNK
GRA MINIMUM LOAD CONTROL B
WHT
WHT
WHT
PL5-4
WHT
FIOP ONLY
TB4
2
Fig. 33A — 30GX Minimum Load Valve Accessory Wiring
RELAY BOARD 2
T3
T1
GRA
PNK
NOTE: Gray, Pink, and White wires are included in the control b ox as part of the factory wire harness. Field supplied and installed wire is needed from control box to solenoid valves.
Fig. 33B — 30HX Minimum Load Valve Accessory Wiring
MINIMUM LOAD CONTROL CIRCUIT B
MINIMUM LOAD CONTROL CIRCUIT A
72
WHT
TB4
2
Page 73
RELAY BOARD 2
T6
K4
K5
RB2PL2-5
RB2PL2-3
BLK
BLK
TB2
TB2
CFCA
C1
1
C1
CPR/
CFCB
6
C2
C2
TB4
2
MAX. LOAD ALLOWED AT TB2-1 AND TB2-6 IS 125 VA SEALED, 1250 VA INRUSH AT 115 OR 230 VOLTS. MIN. LOAD 10 VA SEALED.
FIELD SUPPLIED
Fig. 34 — Condensing Pump Relay Wiring; 30HXC and Remote Condensing Fan On/Off Wiring; 30HXA
DSIO (EXV)-J3
TB2
12
TB2 TB2
REMOTE ON/OFF CONTACTS
COOLER FLOW SWITCH
TB2
11
CHILLED WATER PUMP INTERLOCK CONTACTS
RED
Fig. 35 — Chilled Water Interlock and Flow Switch Input Wiring
REMOTE
RED
13 14
TB2
OFF
RED
3
DSIO (EXV)-J3
1
12
RED
Fig. 36 — Remote On/Off Switch Input Wiring
73
Page 74
CONDENSER ENTERING
A
D
A
D
WA TER THERMIST OR 5 kΩ AT 77F (25C) (FIELD SUPPLIED)
CONDENSER LEAVING WA TER THERMIST OR 5 kΩ AT 77F (25C) (FIELD SUPPLIED)
PSIO-2, J7 PLUGS
14
15
TOP
17
18
FIELD SUPPLIED AND POWERED 4-20 mA SIGNAL
FIELD SUPPLIED AND POWERED 4-20 mA SIGNAL
FIELD SUPPLIED 24 VAC
OUTDOOR AIR THERMISTOR 5 kΩ AT 77F (25C) (FIELD SUPPLIED)
4-20 mA SIGNAL GENERATOR TEMPERATURE RESET
4-20 mA SIGNAL GENERATOR DEMAND LIMIT
CONDENSER FLOW SWITCH
REMOTE DUAL SETPOINT
+
-
+
-
ICE DONE
19
20
BOTTOM
22
23
25
28
31
32
35
36
500 OHM, 1/2 W FIELD SUPPLIE RESISTOR
500 OHM, 1/2 W FIELD SUPPLIE RESISTOR
FIELD SUPPLIED 4-20 mA WATER VALVE (30HXC ONLY) SEPARATE POWER SUPPLY REQUIRED FOR ACTUATOR MOTOR
Fig. 37 — PSIO-2 Wiring for Accessories and Field-Installed Options, 30HX Units
4-20 mA WATER VALVE
74
PSIO-2, J6 PLUG
+
-
46
47
Page 75
FIELD SUPPLIED AND POWERED 4-20 mA SIGNAL
4-20 mA SIGNAL GENERATOR DEMAND LIMIT
PSIO-2, J7 PLUGS
TOP
+
-
13
500 OHM, 1/2 WATT FIELD SUPPLIED
14
RESISTOR
OUTDOOR AIR THERMISTOR 5 kΩ AT 77 F (25C) (FIELD SUPPLIED)
FIELD SUPPLIED AND POWERED 4-20 mA SIGNAL
SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 10 kΩ AT 77F (25C) (FIELD SUPPLIED)
FIELD SUPPLIED 24 VAC
4-20 mA SIGNAL GENERATOR TEMPERATURE RESET
DEMAND LIMIT EXTERNAL SWITCH
REMOTE DUAL SETPOINT
+
-
ICE DONE
STAGE 2
STAGE 1
20
21
BOTTOM
22
23
24
25
28
31
34
35
500 OHM, 1/2 WATT FIELD SUPPLIED RESISTOR
MOTORMASTER® OPTION (080-150, 160) CIRCUIT A (151, 161-350)
MOTORMASTER OPTION CIRCUIT B (151, 161-350)
Fig. 38 — PSIO-2 Wiring for Accessories and Field-Installed Options, 30GX Units
VIO
GRA
VIO
GRA
30GX ONLY
VIO
GRA
VIO
GRA
PSIO-2, J6 PLUG
46
47
49
50
75
Page 76
APPENDIX A
Compressor Protection Module Configuration Header Punch-Outs and Must Trip Amps
1
UNIT
MODEL
NUMBER
30GX-080---1 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 98 — 82 30GX-080---2 1, 2, 5, 6 ,7 — 1, 2, 4, 5 ,7 148 — 124 30GX-080---5 1, 4, 8 — 1, 3, 6, 7, 8 270 — 226 30GX-080---6 1, 2, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 6, 8 122 — 102 30GX-080---8 1, 4, 5 — 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 256 — 212 30GX-080---9 1, 2, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 5 156 — 128
30GX-090---1 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 120 — 82 30GX-090---2 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 180 — 124 30GX-090---5 2, 3, 4, 6 — 1, 3, 6, 7, 8 328 — 226 30GX-090---6 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 6, 8 148 — 102 30GX-090---8 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 — 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 310 — 212 30GX-090---9 1, 3, 4, 5, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 5 188 — 128
30GX-105---8 2, 3, 5, 6 — 1, 3, 8 344 — 238 30GX-105---9 1, 3, 4 — 1, 2, 4 208 — 144
30GX-106---1 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 134 — 92 30GX-106---2 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 4, 7 202 — 140 30GX-106---5 2, 3 — 1, 4, 5, 8 368 — 254 30GX-106---6 1, 2, 6 — 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 168 — 114 30GX-106---8 2, 3, 5, 6 — 1, 3, 8 344 — 238 30GX-106---9 1, 3, 4 — 1, 2, 4 208 — 144
30GX-115---1 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 162 — 92 30GX-115---2 1, 4, 5, 6, 8 — 1, 2, 4, 7 246 — 140 30GX-115---5 3, 4, 5 — 1, 4, 5, 8 448 — 254 30GX-115---6 1, 3, 4, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 204 — 114 30GX-115---8 2, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 3, 8 418 — 238 30GX-115---9 1, 4, 5, 8 — 1, 2, 4 254 — 144
30GX-125---1 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 8 162 — 110 30GX-125---2 1, 4, 5, 6, 8 — 1, 2, 6 246 — 168 30GX-125---5 3, 4, 5 — 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 448 — 306 30GX-125---6 1, 3, 4, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 7, 8 204 — 138 30GX-125---8 2, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 5 418 — 288 30GX-125---9 1, 4, 5, 8 — 1, 2, 8 254 — 174
30GX-136---1 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 162 — 134 30GX-136---2 1, 4, 5, 6, 8 — 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 246 — 202 30GX-136---5 3, 4, 5 — 2, 3 448 — 3 68 30GX-136---6 1, 3, 4, 7 — 1, 2, 6 204 — 168 30GX-136---8 2, 6, 7, 8 — 2, 3, 5, 6 418 — 344 30GX-136---9 1, 4, 5, 8 — 1, 3, 4 254 — 208
30GX-150---8 2, 3, 5, 6 — 4, 6 344 — 520 30GX-150---9 1, 3, 4 — 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 208 — 314
30GX-151---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 — 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 198 — 134 30GX-151---2 1, 7 — 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 300 — 202 30GX-151---5 6, 7, 8 — 2, 3 546 — 3 68 30GX-151---6 1, 4, 5, 6 — 1, 2, 6 248 — 168
30GX-160---8 2, 6, 7, 8 — 4, 6 418 — 520 30GX-160---9 1, 4, 5, 8 — 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 254 — 314
30GX-161---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 — 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 198 — 162 30GX-161---2 1, 7 — 1, 4, 5, 6, 8 300 — 246 30GX-161---5 6, 7, 8 — 3, 4, 5 546 — 448 30GX-161---6 1, 4, 5, 6 — 1, 3, 4, 7 248 — 204 30GX-161---8 4, 6 — 2, 6, 7, 8 520 — 418 30GX-161---9 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 4, 5, 8 314 — 254
30GX-175---8 4, 6 — 4, 6 520 — 520 30GX-175---9 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 314 — 314
30GX-176---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 — 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 198 — 198 30GX-176---2 1, 7 — 1, 7 300 — 300 30GX-176---5 6, 7, 8 — 6, 7, 8 546 — 546 30GX-176---6 1, 4, 5, 6 — 1, 4, 5, 6 248 — 248
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP A1
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP A2
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP B1
COMP A1
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
8
COMP A2
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
COMP B1
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
76
Page 77
APPENDIX A (cont)
Compressor Protection Module Configuration Header Punch-Outs and Must Trip Amps
1
UNIT
MODEL
NUMBER
30GX-205---8 2, 6, 7, 8 1, 3, 8 4, 6 — 418 238 520 — 30GX-205---9 1, 4, 5, 8 1, 2, 4 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 254 144 314 —
30GX-206---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 — 198 92 162 — 30GX-206---2 1, 7 1, 2, 4, 7 1, 4, 5, 6, 8 — 300 140 246 — 30GX-206---5 6, 7, 8 1, 4, 5, 8 3, 4, 5 — 546 254 448 — 30GX-206---6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 1, 3, 4, 7 — 248 114 204 —
30GX-225---8 4, 6 1, 5 4, 6 — 520 288 520 — 30GX-225---9 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 1, 2, 8 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 314 168 314 —
30GX-226---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 2, 3, 8 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 — 198 110 198 — 30GX-226---2 1, 7 1, 2, 6 1, 7 — 300 168 300 — 30GX-226---5 6, 7, 8 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 6, 7, 8 — 546 306 546 — 30GX-226---6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 4, 7, 8 1, 4, 5, 6 — 248 138 248 — 30GX-226---8 4, 6 1, 5 4, 6 — 520 388 520 — 30GX-226---9 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 1, 2, 8 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 314 174 314 —
30GX-250---8 4, 6 2, 6, 7, 8 4, 6 — 520 418 520 — 30GX-250---9 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 1, 4, 5, 6 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 314 254 314 —
30GX-251---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 — 198 198 162 — 30GX-251---2 1, 7 1, 7 1, 4, 5, 6, 8 — 300 300 246 — 30GX-251---5 6, 7, 8 6, 7, 8 3, 4, 5 — 546 546 448 — 30GX-251---6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 3, 4, 7 — 248 248 204 —
30GX-265---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 — 198 198 198 — 30GX-265---2 1, 7 1, 7 1, 7 — 300 300 300 — 30GX-265---5 6, 7, 8 6, 7, 8 6, 7, 8 — 546 546 546 — 30GX-265---6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 4, 5, 6 — 248 248 248 — 30GX-265---8 4, 6 4, 6 4, 6 — 520 520 520 — 30GX-265---9 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 314 314 314 —
30GX-281---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 2, 3, 8 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 2, 3, 8 198 110 198 110 30GX-281---2 1, 7 1, 2, 6 1, 7 1, 2, 6 300 168 300 168 30GX-281---6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 4, 7, 8 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 4, 7, 8 248 138 248 138 30GX-281---9 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 1, 2, 8 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 1, 2, 8 314 174 314 174
30GX-301---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 198 134 198 134 30GX-301---2 1, 7 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 1, 7 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 300 202 300 202 30GX-301---6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 6 248 168 248 168 30GX-301---9 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 1, 3, 4 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 1, 3, 4 314 208 314 208
30GX-325---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 198 162 198 162 30GX-325---2 1, 7 1, 4, 5, 6, 8 1, 7 1, 4, 5, 6, 8 300 246 300 246 30GX-325---6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 3, 4, 7 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 3, 4, 7 248 204 248 204 30GX-325---9 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 1, 4, 5, 8 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 1, 4, 5, 8 314 254 314 254
30GX-350---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 198 198 198 198 30GX-350---2 1, 7 1, 7 1, 7 1, 7 300 300 300 300 30GX-350---6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 4, 5, 6 248 248 248 248 30GX-350---9 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 314 314 314 314
30HXA076---1 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8 — 82 — 82 — 30HXA076---2 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 — 124 — 124 — 30HXA076---3 1, 2, 4, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 7 — 140 — 140 — 30HXA076---5 1, 3, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 3, 6, 7, 8 — 226 — 226 — 30HXA076---6 1, 2, 3, 6, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 6, 8 — 102 — 102 — 30HXA076---8 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 — 212 — 212 — 30HXA076---9 1, 2, 4, 5 — 1, 2, 4, 5 — 128 — 128 —
30HXA086---1 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 — 98 — 82 — 30HXA086---2 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 — 148 — 124 — 30HXA086---3 1, 2, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 4, 7 — 170 — 140 — 30HXA086---5 1, 4, 8 — 1, 3, 6, 7, 8 — 270 — 226 — 30HXA086---6 1, 2, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 6, 8 — 122 — 102 — 30HXA086---8 1, 4, 5 — 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 — 256 — 212 — 30HXA086---9 1, 2, 5, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 5 — 156 — 128 —
30HXA096---1 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 — 120 — 82 — 30HXA096---2 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 — 180 — 124 — 30HXA096---3 1, 3, 4, 8 — 1, 2, 4, 7 — 206 — 140 — 30HXA096---5 2, 3, 4, 6 — 1, 3, 6, 7, 8 — 328 — 226 — 30HXA096---6 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 6, 8 — 148 — 102 — 30HXA096---8 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 — 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 — 310 — 212 — 30HXA096---9 1, 3, 4, 5, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 5 — 188 — 128 —
30HXA106---1 1, 2, 4 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 — 144 — 82 — 30HXA106---2 1, 3, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 — 218 — 124 — 30HXA106---3 1, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 4, 7 — 250 — 140 — 30HXA106---5 2, 4 — 1, 3, 6, 7, 8 — 400 — 226 — 30HXA106---6 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 6, 8 — 180 — 102 — 30HXA106---8 2, 4, 5, 6 — 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 — 376 — 212 — 30HXA106---9 1, 3, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 5 — 228 — 128 —
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP A1
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP A2
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP B1
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP B2
COMP A1
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
8
COMP A2
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
COMP B1
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
COMP B2
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
77
Page 78
APPENDIX A (cont)
Compressor Protection Module Configuration Header Punch-Outs and Must Trip Amps
1
UNIT
MODEL
NUMBER
30HXA116---1 1, 2, 4 — 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8 144 — 98 30HXA116---2 1, 3, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 218 — 148 30HXA116---3 1, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 7, 8 250 — 170 30HXA116---5 2, 4 — 1, 4, 8 400 — 270 30HXA116---6 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 5, 7, 8 180 — 122 30HXA116---8 2, 4, 5, 6 — 1, 4, 5 376 — 256 30HXA116---9 1, 3, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 5, 7 228 — 156
30HXA126---1 1, 2, 4 — 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 144 — 120 30HXA126---2 1, 3, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 218 — 180 30HXA126---3 1, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 3, 4, 8 250 — 206 30HXA126---5 2, 4 — 2, 3, 4, 6 400 — 328 30HXA126---6 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 180 — 148 30HXA126---8 2, 4, 5, 6 — 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 376 — 310 30HXA126---9 1, 3, 6, 7 — 1, 3, 4, 5, 7 228 — 188
30HXA136---1 1, 2 — 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 176 — 120 30HXA136---2 1, 4, 7, 8 — 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 266 — 180 30HXA136---3 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 3, 4, 8 306 — 206 30HXA136---5 3, 6, 8 — 2, 3, 4, 6 486 — 328 30HXA136---6 1, 3, 5, 7 — 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 220 — 148 30HXA136---8 3, 4, 8 — 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 462 — 310 30HXA136---9 1, 5, 6 — 1, 3, 4, 5, 7 280 — 188
30HXA146---1 1, 2 — 1, 2, 4 176 — 144 30HXA146---2 1, 4, 7, 8 — 1, 3, 5, 7, 8 266 — 218 30HXA146---3 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 4, 5, 7, 8 306 — 250 30HXA146---5 3, 6, 8 — 2, 4 486 — 400 30HXA146---6 1, 3, 5, 7 — 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 220 — 180 30HXA146---8 3, 4, 8 — 2, 4, 5, 6 462 — 376 30HXA146---9 1, 5, 6 — 1, 3, 6, 7 280 — 228
30HXA161---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 — 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 198 — 134 30HXA161---2 1, 7 — 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 300 — 202 30HXA161---3 2, 3, 5, 6 — 1, 3, 6, 7 344 — 228 30HXA161---5 6, 7, 8 — 2, 3 546 — 368 30HXA161---6 1, 4, 5, 6 — 1, 2, 6 248 — 168 30HXA161---8 4, 6 — 2, 3, 5, 6 520 — 344 30HXA161---9 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 3, 4 314 — 208
30HXA171---1 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 162 — 198 30HXA171---2 1, 4, 5, 6, 8 — 1,7 246 — 300 30HXA171---3 1, 5, 6, 8 — 2, 3, 5, 6 278 — 344 30HXA171---5 3, 4, 5 — 6, 7, 8 448 — 546 30HXA171---6 1, 3, 4, 7 — 1, 4, 5, 6 204 — 248 30HXA171---8 2, 6, 7, 8 — 4, 6 418 — 520 30HXA171---9 1, 4, 5, 8 — 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 254 — 314
30HXA186---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 — 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 198 — 198 30HXA186---2 1, 7 — 1, 7 300 — 300 30HXA186---3 2, 3, 5, 6 — 2, 3, 5, 6 344 — 344 30HXA186---5 6, 7, 8 — 6, 7, 8 546 — 546 30HXA186---6 1, 4, 5, 6 — 1, 4, 5, 6 248 — 248 30HXA186---8 4, 6 — 4, 6 520 — 520 30HXA186---9 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 314 — 314
30HXA206---1 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 162 92 198 30HXA206---2 1, 4, 5, 6, 8 1, 2, 4, 7 1, 7 246 138 300 30HXA206---3 1, 5, 6, 8 1, 2, 5, 8 2, 3, 5, 6 278 158 344 30HXA206---5 3, 4, 5 1, 4, 5, 8 6, 7, 8 448 254 546 30HXA206---6 1, 3, 4, 7 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 1, 4, 5, 6 204 116 248 30HXA206---8 2, 6, 7, 8 1, 3, 8 4, 6 418 238 520 30HXA206---9 1, 4, 5, 8 1, 2, 4 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 254 144 314
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP A1
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP A2
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP B1
COMP A1
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
8
COMP A2
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
COMP B1
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
78
Page 79
Compressor Protection Module Configuration Header Punch-Outs and Must Trip Amps
APPENDIX A (cont)
1
UNIT
MODEL
NUMBER
30HXA246---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 198 134 198 30HXA246---2 1, 7 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 1, 7 300 202 300 30HXA246---3 2, 3, 5, 6 1, 3, 6, 7 2, 3, 5, 6 344 228 344 30HXA246---5 6, 7, 8 2, 3 6, 7, 8 546 368 546 30HXA246---6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 2, 6 1, 4, 5, 6 248 168 248 30HXA246---8 4, 6 2, 3, 5 ,6 4, 6 520 344 520 30HXA246---9 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 1, 3, 4 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 314 208 314
30HXA261---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 198 162 198 30HXA261---2 1, 7 1, 4, 5, 6, 8 1, 7 300 246 300 30HXA261---3 2, 3, 5, 6 1, 5, 6, 8 2, 3, 5, 6 344 278 344 30HXA261---5 6, 7, 8 3, 4, 5 6, 7, 8 546 448 546 30HXA261---6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 3, 4, 7 1, 4, 5, 6 248 204 248 30HXA261---8 4, 6 2, 6, 7, 8 4, 6 520 418 520 30HXA261---9 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 1, 4, 5, 8 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 314 254 314
30HXA271---1 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 1, 3, 4, 6, 8 198 198 198 30HXA271---2 1, 7 1, 7 1, 7 300 300 300 30HXA271---3 2, 3, 5, 6 2, 3, 5, 6 2, 3, 5, 6 344 344 344 30HXA271---5 6, 7, 8 6, 7, 8 6, 7, 8 546 546 546 30HXA271---6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 4, 5, 6 1, 4, 5, 6 248 248 248 30HXA271---8 4, 6 4, 6 4, 6 520 520 520 30HXA271---9 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 314 314 314
30HXC076---1 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 — 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 56 — 56 30HXC076---2 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7 84 — 84 30HXC076---3 1, 2, 3, 5 — 1, 2, 3, 5 96 — 96 30HXC076---5 1, 2, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 5, 7, 8 154 — 154 30HXC076---6 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 70 — 70 30HXC076---8 1, 2, 4 — 1, 2, 4 144 — 144 30HXC076---9 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 88 — 88
30HXC086---1 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 68 — 56 30HXC086---2 1, 2, 3, 6, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7 102 — 8 4 30HXC086---3 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 5 116 — 96 30HXC086---5 1, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 5, 7, 8 186 — 154 30HXC086---6 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 84 — 70 30HXC086---8 1, 2 — 1, 2, 4 176 — 144 30HXC086---9 1, 2, 3, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 106 — 88
30HXC096---1 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 82 — 56 30HXC096---2 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7 124 — 8 4 30HXC096---3 1, 2, 4, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 5 140 — 96 30HXC096---5 1, 3, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 5, 7, 8 226 — 154 30HXC096---6 1, 2, 3, 6 — 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 104 — 70 30HXC096---8 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 4 212 — 144 30HXC096---9 1, 2, 4, 5 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 128 — 88
30HXC106---1 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 100 — 5 6 30HXC106---2 1, 2, 5, 6, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7 150 — 8 4 30HXC106---3 1, 2, 6 — 1, 2, 3, 5 168 — 96 30HXC106---5 1, 5, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 5, 7, 8 274 — 154 30HXC106---6 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 124 — 7 0 30HXC106---8 1, 4, 5, 8 — 1, 2, 4 254 — 144 30HXC106---9 1, 2, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 154 — 88
30HXC116---1 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 100 — 6 8 30HXC116---2 1, 2, 5, 6, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 6, 8 150 — 102 30HXC116---3 1, 2, 6 — 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 168 — 116 30HXC116---5 1, 5, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 274 — 186 30HXC116---6 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7 124 — 8 4 30HXC116---8 1, 4, 5, 8 — 1, 2 254 — 176 30HXC116---9 1, 2, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 7, 8 154 — 106
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP A1
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP A2
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP B1
COMP A1
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
8
COMP A2
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
COMP B1
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
79
Page 80
APPENDIX A (cont)
Compressor Protection Module Configuration Header Punch-Outs and Must Trip Amps
1
UNIT
MODEL
NUMBER
30HXC126---1 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 100 — 82 30HXC126---2 1, 2, 5, 6, 8 — 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 150 — 124 30HXC126---3 1, 2, 6 — 1, 2, 4, 7 168 — 140 30HXC126---5 1, 5, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 3, 6, 7, 8 274 — 226 30HXC126---6 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 6 124 — 104 30HXC126---8 1, 4, 5, 8 — 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 254 — 212 30HXC126---9 1, 2, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 4, 5 154 — 128
30HXC136---1 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 120 — 82 30HXC136---2 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 180 — 124 30HXC136---3 1, 3, 4, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 7 204 — 140 30HXC136---5 2, 3, 4, 6 — 1, 3, 6, 7, 8 328 — 226 30HXC136---6 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 3, 6 148 — 104 30HXC136---8 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 308 — 212 30HXC136---9 1, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 4, 5 186 — 128
30HXC146---1 1, 2, 4, 5, 6 — 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 120 — 100 30HXC146---2 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 5, 6, 8 180 — 150 30HXC146---3 1, 3, 4, 7 — 1, 2, 6 204 — 168 30HXC146---5 2, 3, 4, 6 — 1, 5, 6, 7, 8 328 — 274 30HXC146---6 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 148 — 124 30HXC146---8 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 — 1, 4, 5, 8 308 — 254 30HXC146---9 1, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 5, 7, 8 186 — 154
30HXC161---1 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8 130 — 90 30HXC161---2 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 6 196 — 136 30HXC161---3 1, 3, 5, 7 — 1, 2, 5, 6 220 — 152 30HXC161---5 2, 3, 6, 8 — 1, 4, 5, 6, 8 358 — 246 30HXC161---6 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 3 162 — 112 30HXC161---8 2, 4, 5, 7 — 1, 3, 6, 7 332 — 228 30HXC161---9 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 4, 7, 8 202 — 138
30HXC171---1 1, 2, 3, 7 — 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 108 — 130 30HXC171---2 1, 2, 6, 7 — 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 164 — 196 30HXC171---3 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 — 1, 3, 5, 7 182 — 220 30HXC171---5 1, 7, 8 — 2, 3, 6, 8 298 — 358 30HXC171---6 1, 2, 4, 6 — 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 136 — 162 30HXC171---8 1, 5, 6, 7, 8 — 2, 3, 4, 7 274 — 332 30HXC171---9 1, 2, 6, 8 — 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 166 — 202
30HXC186---1 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 130 — 130 30HXC186---2 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 — 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 196 — 196 30HXC186---3 1, 3, 5, 7 — 1, 3, 5, 7 220 — 220 30HXC186---5 2, 3, 6, 8 — 2, 3, 6, 8 358 — 358 30HXC186---6 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 — 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 162 — 162 30HXC186---8 2, 3, 4, 7 — 2, 3, 4, 7 332 — 332 30HXC186---9 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 — 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 202 — 202
30HXC206---1 1, 2, 3, 7 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 108 62 130 30HXC206---2 1, 2, 6, 7 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 164 92 196 30HXC206---3 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 1, 2, 3, 6 1, 3, 5, 7 182 104 220 30HXC206---5 1, 7, 8 1, 2, 6 2, 3, 6, 8 298 168 358 30HXC206---6 1, 2, 4, 6 1, 2, 3, 4, 7 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 136 76 162 30HXC206---8 1, 5, 6, 7, 8 1, 2, 5, 7 2, 3, 4, 7 274 156 332 30HXC206---9 1, 2, 6, 8 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 166 94 202
30HXC246---1 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 130 90 130 30HXC246---2 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 1, 2, 4, 6 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 196 136 196 30HXC246---3 1, 3, 5, 7 1, 2, 5, 6 1, 3, 5, 7 220 152 220 30HXC246---5 2, 3, 6, 8 1, 4, 5, 6, 8 2, 3, 6, 8 358 246 358 30HXC246---6 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 162 112 162 30HXC246---8 2, 3, 4, 7 1, 3, 6, 7 2, 3, 4, 7 332 228 332 30HXC246---9 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 1, 2, 4, 7, 8 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 202 138 202
30HXC261---1 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 1, 2, 3, 7 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 130 108 130 30HXC261---2 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 1, 2, 6, 7 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 196 164 196 30HXC261---3 1, 3, 5, 7 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 1, 3, 5, 7 220 182 220 30HXC261---5 2, 3, 6, 8 1, 7, 8 2, 3, 6, 8 358 298 358 30HXC261---6 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 1, 2, 4, 6 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 162 136 162 30HXC261---8 2, 3, 4 ,7 1, 5, 6, 7, 8 2, 3, 4, 7 332 274 332 30HXC261---9 1, 3, 4 ,7, 8 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 202 166 202
30HXC271---1 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8 130 130 130 30HXC271---2 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 196 196 196 30HXC271---3 1, 3, 5, 7 1, 3, 5, 7 1, 3, 5, 7 220 220 220 30HXC271---5 2, 3, 6, 8 2, 3, 6, 8 2, 3, 6, 8 358 358 358 30HXC271---6 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 1, 2, 6, 7, 8 162 162 162 30HXC271---8 2, 3, 4, 7 2, 3, 4, 7 2, 3, 4, 7 332 332 332 30HXC271---9 1, 3, 4 ,7, 8 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 202 202 202
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP A1
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP A2
PUNCH OUTS
FOR
COMP B1
COMP A1
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
8
COMP A2
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
COMP B1
MUST TRIP AMPS
SETTING
80
Page 81
APPENDIX B
Capacity Loading Sequence Example —
The fol­lowing tables show the loading sequence for a 30HX186 (50/50 split) and a 30HX161 (59/41 split) chiller. Each
STAND ARD LO ADING SEQ UENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT, 2-COMPRESSOR UNIT)
ST A GE
0 00 000 0 0.0 0.0 110 000 0 20.0 23.5 211 000 0 35.0 41.1 311 100 0 50.0 58.8 411 011 0 70.0 70.0 511 011 1 85.0 82.4 61 1 1 1 1 1 100.0 100.0
ST A GE
0 00 000 0 0.0 0.0 110 000 0 20.0 23.5 211 000 0 35.0 41.1
311 100 0 50.0 58.8 3A 10 010 0 40.0 40.0 3B 10 011 0 55.0 52.4
410 011 1 70.0 64.7
511 011 1 85.0 82.4
61 1 1 1 1 1 100.0 100.0
LEGEND
0 —Off 1—On
NOTES:
1. Stage 3A (and 3B for 59/41 split) is not used by the algorithm when increas­ing stages. Stage 3 (and 2 for a 59/41 split) is not used when de creasing stages.
2. The % Total Capacities above are calculated based on compressor nominal tons. For the case of the 5 9/41 split above, the 30HX us es compressors with flow rates of 250 and 174 cfm (from compressor model numbers 06N__250 and 06N__174), which represent nominal tons of 80 and 56 (respectively) at 60Hz. A factor of 40% is us ed when no loader s are en er­gized, and a factor of 70% is used when Loader 1 is energized. The capac­ity shown for Stage 3B above is calculated as follows: % Total Capacity=[(0.40 x 80 + 0.70 x 56)/(80 + 56)] x 100% =52.4 %
COMP
A1
COMP
A1
LOADER
A1
CLOSE CONTROL LO ADING SEQUENCE (CIRCUIT A LE AD CIRCUIT, 2-COMPRESSOR UNIT)
LOADER
A1
LOADER
A2
LOADER
A2
COMP
B1
COMP
B1
compressor has 2 loaders. There is no difference in operation between “Staged” and “Equal” circuit loading on 2 compressor chillers.
LOADER
B1
LOADER
B1
LOADER
B2
LOADER
B2
% TOTAL
CAPACITY
(50/50 Split)
% TOTAL
CAPACITY
(50/50 Split)
% TOTAL
CAPACITY
(59/41 Split)
% TOTAL
CAPACITY
(59/41 Split)
Nominal Tons
COMPRESSOR
PART NO. 06N__123 39 — 06N__146 46 39 06N__174 56 46 06N__209 66 56 06N__250 80 66 06N__300 —80
60 Hz NOM.
TONS
50 Hz NOM.
TONS
81
Page 82
APPENDIX B (cont)
The following tables show the loading sequence for 30HX206 (57/43 split) and 30HX271 (67/33 split) chillers. All compressors
STAND ARD LO ADING SEQ UENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT, 3-COMPRESSOR UNIT)
STA GE
0 00 0000 0 0.0 0.0 110 0000 0 14.3 13.3 211 0000 0 25.0 23.3 311 1000 0 35.7 33.3 411 0011 0 55.2 46.7 511 0011 1 68.2 56.7 611 1011 1 78.9 66.7 711 0111 1 83.0 80.0 811 1111 1 100.0 100.0
STAGE
0 00 0000 0 0.0 0.0 110 0000 0 14.3 13.3 211 0000 0 25.0 23.3 311 1000 0 35.7 33.3
3A 10 0010 0 31.6 26.7
410 0011 0 44.5 36.7 510 0011 1 57.5 46.7 611 0011 1 68.2 56.7 711 1011 1 78.9 66.7
7A 10 0111 1 65.9 60.0
811 0111 1 83.0 80.0 91 1 1 1 1 1 1 100.0 100.0
LEGEND
0 —Off 1—On
COMP
A1
COMP
A1
LOADER
A1
CLOSE CONTROL LOADING SEQ UENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT, 3-COMPRESSOR UNIT)
LOADER
A1
LOADER
A2
LOADER
A2
COMPA2COMP
COMPA2COMP
B1
B1
have two loaders and the chillers are configured for equal cir cuit loading. See Note 2.
LOADER
B1
LOADER
B1
LOADER
B2
LOADER
B2
% TOTAL
CAP ACITY
(57/43 Split)
% TOTAL
CAP ACITY
(57/43 Split)
% TOTAL
CAPACITY
(67/33 Split)
% TOTAL
CAP ACITY
(67/33 Split)
NOTES:
1. Stages 3A and 7A are not used by the al gorithm when incr easing stages. Stages 3 and 7 are not used when decreasing stages.
2. T he loa ding se quence for 30GX 205- 265 u nits is the same as t hose s hown for the 30HX206,271 above.
82
Page 83
APPENDIX B (cont)
The following tables show the loading sequence for 30HX206 (57/43 split) and 30HX271 (67/33 split) chillers. All compres­sors have two loaders and the chiller is configured for staged
STAND ARD LO ADING SEQ UENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT, 3-COMPRESSOR UNIT)
STA GE
0 00 0000 0 0.0 0.0 110 0000 0 14.3 13.3 211 0000 0 25.0 23.3 311 1000 0 35.7 33.3 411 0100 0 39.7 46.7 511 1100 0 56.8 66.7 611 1111 0 87.0 90.0 711 1111 1 100.0 100.0
STA GE
0 00 0000 0 0.0 0.0 110 0000 0 14.3 13.3 211 0000 0 25.0 23.3 311 1000 0 35.7 33.3
3A 10 0100 0 22.7 26.7
411 0100 0 39.7 46.7 511 1100 0 56.8 66.7 611 1110 0 74.1 80.0 711 1111 0 87.0 90.0 811 1111 1 100.0 100.0
LEGEND
0 —Off 1—On
NOTES:
1. St age 3A is not use d by the algori thm when incre asing stages. Stag e 3 is not used by the algorithm when decreasing stages.
2. The % T otal Capacities above are calculated based on compressor nominal tons. For the case of the 5 7/43 split above, the 30HX us es compressors
COMP
A1
COMP
A1
LOADER
A1
CLOSE CONTROL LO ADING SEQUENCE (CIRCUIT A LE AD CIRCUIT, 3-COMPRESSOR UNIT)
LOADER
A1
LOADER
A2
LOADER
A2
COMPA2COMP
COMPA2COMP
B1
B1
circuit loading. Loaders A1 on compressors A1 and A2 are en­ergized in parallel. The same is true for Loaders A2 on both
% TOTAL
CAP ACITY
% TOTAL
CAP ACITY
% TOTAL
CAPACITY
(67/33 Split)
% TOTAL
CAPACITY
(67/33 Split)
compressors A1 and A2. See Note 3.
LOADER
B1
LOADER
B1
with flow rates of 209, 123, and 250 cfm (from compressor mode l numbers 06N_209, 06N_123, and 06N_250), which repre sent nominal tons of 66, 39, and 80 (respectively) at 60Hz. A factor of 40% is used when no loaders are energized, and a factor of 70% is used when L oader 1 is energized. The capacity shown for Stage 4 above is calculated as follows: % T otal Capacity=[(0.70 x 66 + 0.70 x 39 + 0.0 x 80)/(66 + 39 + 80)] x 100% = 39.7 %
3. The load ing sequence fo 30GX205-265 uni ts is the same as those shown for the 30HX206, 271 above.
LOADER
B2
LOADER
B2
(57/43 Split)
(57/43 Split)
83
Page 84
APPENDIX B (cont)
The following tables show the loading sequence for a 30GX350 chiller. Each compressor has 2 loaders and the chill­er is configured for equal circuit loading. See Note 2.
STAND ARD LO ADING SEQ UENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT, 4-COMPRESSOR UNIT)
ST A GE
0 00 0000 00 0.0 110 0000 00 10.0 211 0000 00 18.0 311 1000 00 25.0 411 0011 00 35.0 511 1011 00 43.0 611 1011 10 50.0 711 0111 10 60.0 811 0111 01 70.0 911 1111 01 85.0
10 11 1111 11 100.0
ST A GE
0 00 0000 00 0.0 110 0000 00 10.0 211 0000 00 18.0 311 1000 00 25.0
3A 10 0010 00 20.0
410 0011 00 28.0 511 0011 00 35.0 611 1011 00 43.0 711 1011 10 50.0
7A 10 0111 10 45.0
811 0111 10 60.0
911 0111 01 70.0 10 11 1111 01 85.0 11 11 1111 11 100.0
LEGEND
0 —Off 1—On
COMP
A1
COMP
A1
LOADER
A1
CLOSE CONTROL LOADING SEQ UENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT, 4-COMPRESSOR UNIT)
LOADER
A1
LOADER
A2
LOADER
A2
COMP
A2
COMP
A2
COMP
B1
COMP
B1
LOADER
B1
LOADER
B1
LOADER
B2
LOADER
B2
COMP
B2
COMP
B2
% TOTAL
CAP ACITY
(50/50 Split)
% TOTAL
CAP ACITY
(50/50 Split)
NOTES:
1. Stages 3A and 7A are not used by the al gorithm when incr easing stages. Stages 3 and 7 are not used by the algorithm when decreasing stages.
2. The load ing sequence for 30GX281-325 uni ts is the same as th ose shown for the 30GX350 above.
84
Page 85
APPENDIX B (cont)
The following tables show the loading sequence for a 30GX350 chiller. Each compressor has 2 loaders and the chill­ers are configured for staged circuit loading. See Note 2.
STAND ARD LO ADING SEQ UENCE (CIRCUIT A LEAD CIRCUIT, 4-COMPRESSOR UNIT)
ST A GE
0 00 0000 00 0.0 110 0000 00 10.0 211 0000 00 18.0 311 1000 00 25.0 411 0100 00 35.0 511 1100 00 50.0 611 1111 00 68.0 711 1111 10 75.0 811 1111 01 85.0 911 1111 11 100.0
ST A GE
0 00 0000 00 0.0 110 0000 00 10.0 211 0000 00 18.0 311 1000 00 25.0
3A 10 0100 00 20.0
411 0100 00 35.0 511 1100 00 50.0 611 1110 00 60.0 711 1111 00 68.0 811 1111 10 75.0
8A 11 1110 01 70.0
911 1111 01 85.0
10 11 1111 11 100.0
LEGEND
0 —Off 1—On
COMP
A1
COMP
A1
LOADER
A1
CLOSE CONTROL LO ADING SEQUENCE (CIRCUIT A LE AD CIRCUIT, 4-COMPRESSOR UNIT)
LOADER
A1
LOADER
A2
LOADER
A2
COMP
A2
COMP
A2
COMP
B1
COMP
B1
LOADER
B1
LOADER
B1
LOADER
B2
LOADER
B2
COMP
B2
COMP
B2
% TOTAL
CAP ACITY
(50/50 Split)
% TOTAL
CAP ACITY
(50/50 Split)
NOTES:
1. Stages 3A and 8A are not used by the al gorithm when incr easing stages. Stages 3 and 8 are not used by the algorithm when decreasing stages.
2. The load ing sequence for 30GX281-325 uni ts is the same as th ose shown for the 30GX350 above.
85
Page 86
APPENDIX C
The following are the available accessories for 30GX,HXA,HXC units.
ACCESSOR Y
P ART NUMBER
30GX-900-001 30GX080-105 Condenser Grille Package 30GX-900-002 30GX106-125 Condenser Grille Package 30GX-900-003 30GX136, 150, 160 Condenser Grille Package 30GX-900-013 30GX151, 161, 175, 205, 225 Condenser Grille Package 30GX-900-024 30GX176 Condenser Grille Package 30GX-900-009 30GX206, 226, 250 Condenser Grille Package 30GX-900-010 30GX251, 265 Condenser Grille Package 30GX-900-034 30GX281-350 Condenser Grille Package 30GX-900-004 30GX (115 V Control) Minimum Load Valve Both circuits 30GX-900-005 30GX (230 V Control) Minimum Load Valve Both circuits 30GX-900-006 30GX (230, 460 V) Control Transformer 30GX-900-007 30GX (575 V) Control Transformer 30GX-900-008 30GX (208 V) Control Transformer 30GX-900-012 30GX080-150, 160 3-Phase Motormaster 30GX-900-014 30GX151, 161-350 3-Phase Motormaster Control Two controllers 30GX-900-015 30GX080-350 Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle Header end only 30GX-900-016 30GX080-105 Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle One side per package 30GX-900-017 30GX106-125 Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle One side per package 30GX-900-018 30GX136, 150, 160 Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle One side per package
30GX-900-019 30GX151, 161, 175, 205, 225 Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle
30GX-900-020 30GX176, 206, 226, 250 Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle 30GX-900-028 30GX205, 225 Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle Control box side only
30GX-900-029 30GX206, 226, 250 Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle Control box side only 30GX-900-030 30GX251, 265 Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle Cooler side only 30GX-900-031 30GX251, 265 Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle Control box side only 30GX-900-039 30GX281-350 Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle Cooler side only 30GX-900-040 30GX281-350 Sound Enclosure/Hail Guard/Wind Baffle Control box side only 30GX-900-021 30GX (230 V Control) Cooler Heater 30GX-900-022 30GX (115 V Control) Cooler Heater 30GX-900-023 30GX080-265 Vibration Isolation Pads 30GX-900-035 30GX281-350 Vibration Isolation Pads
30GX-900-025
30GX-900-026 30GX150, 151
30GX-900-027 30GX150, 151
30GX-900-032
30GX-900-033 30GX150-151
30GX-900-036 30GX281-350
30GX-900-037 30GX281-350
30GX-900-038 30GX281-350 30HX-900-001 30HX116-271 Sound Enclosure Panels
30HX-900-011 30HX076-106 Sound Enclosure Panels 30HX-900-002
30HX-900-003
30HX-900-014 30HX-900-028 30GX281-350 Victaulic Cooler Connections (20 in.)
30GX105-136, 160-176 30HX161-186
30GX205-265 30HX206- 27 1
30GX080-090, 150, 151 30HX076-096, 116-146
30GX105-136, 160-176 30HX106, 161-186
30GX205-265 30HX206-271
USED ON DESCRIPTION OF ACCESSORY COMMENTS
®
Control Single controller
One side per package (151, 161, 175) cooler side only (205, 225)
One side per package (176) cooler side only (206, 226, 250)
Insulation Kit (16”, 3- Pass Cooler with Econ o m i zer)
Insulation Kit (14”, 2- Pass Cooler with Econ o m i zer)
Insulation Kit (14”, 1- Pass Cooler with Econ o m i zer)
Insulation Kit (18”, 3- Pass Cooler with Econ o m i zer)
Insulation Kit (14”, 3- Pass Cooler with Econ o m i zer)
Insulation Kit (20”, 3- Pass Cooler with Econ o m i zer)
Insulation Kit (20”, 2- Pass Cooler with Econ o m i zer)
Insulation Kit (20”, 1- Pass Cooler with Econ o m i zer)
Victaulic Cooler Connections (14 in.)
Victaulic Cooler Connections (16 in.)
Victaulic Cooler Connections (18 in.)
T ubesheets/heads/economizers
T ubesheets/heads/economizers
T ubesheets/heads/economizers
T ubesheets/heads/economizers
T ubesheets/heads/economizers
T ubesheets/heads/economizers
T ubesheets/heads/economizers
T ubesheets/heads/economizers
86
Page 87
APPENDIX C (cont)
The following are the available accessories for 30GX,HXA,HXC units.
ACCESSOR Y
P ART NUMBER
30HX-900-015 30HX206-271 Victaulic Condenser Connections (22 in.) 30HX-900-004 30HX076-146 Victaulic Condenser Connections (18 in.) 30HX-900-005 30HX161-186 Victaulic Condenser Connections (20 in.) 30HX-900-006 30HX (230, 460 V) Control Transformer 30HX-900-013 30HX (575 V) Control Transformer 30HX-900-008 30HX (115 V Control) Minimum Load Valve Single circuit 30HX-900-009 30HX (230 V Control) Minimum Load Valve Single circuit 30HX-900-010 30HX076-271 Vibration Isolation Pads
30HX-900-016
30HX-900-017
30HX-900-020
30HX-900-021
30HX-900-022
30HX-900-023
CRLIDASY001A00 30GX, 30HX all Remote Enhanced Display
30GT-911-057 30GX all Unit Control Display Access Door
30GX080, 090 30HX076-096, 116-146
30GX080, 090 30HX076-096, 116-146
30GX105-136, 160-176 30HX161-186
30GX160-176 30HX161- 18 6
30GX205-265 30HX206- 27 1
30GX205-265 30HX206- 27 1
USED ON DESCRIPTION OF ACCESSORY COMMENTS
Insulation Kit (14”, 3-Pass Cooler, no Economizer)
Insulation Kit (14”, 2-Pass Cooler, no Economizer)
Insulation Kit (16”, 2- Pass Cooler with Econ o m i z er )
Insulation Kit (16”, 1- Pass Cooler with Econ o m i z er )
Insulation Kit (18”, 2- Pass Cooler with Econ o m i z er )
Insulation Kit (18”, 1- Pass Cooler with Econ o m i z er )
Tubesheets/heads
Tubesheets/heads
T ubesheets/heads/economizers
T ubesheets/heads/economizers
T ubesheets/heads/economizers
T ubesheets/heads/economizers
87
Page 88
APPENDIX D
Building Interface —
The 30GX,HX chiller can be interfaced with multi-vendor control systems through 3 levels of inter-operability using BacLink, DataPort, or DataLink. BacLink functions as a gateway between a CCN and a BACnet system to facilitate the passing of data from the CCN to BACnet. The Carrier DataPort is an interface device that allows other HVAC control systems to “read only” values in system elements connected to a CCN communication bus. The
BacLink Object Definition
CCN T ABLE NAME DESCR IP TI O N POINT ACC E SS
Control Mode Run Status Occupied CCN Enable CCN Chiller Start/Stop Alarm State Current Alarm 1 Current Alarm 2
A_UNIT_1
CIRCA_AN
CIRCA_DIO
CIRCB_AN
CIRB_DIO
UNIT_2
LEGEND
RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write
Current Alarm 3 Current Alarm 4 Current Alarm 5 Active Demand Limit Percent Total Capacity Control Point Entering Fluid Temp Leaving Fluid T emp Emergency Stop Heat/Cool Status
Percent Total Capacity Percent Av ailable Capacity Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure A1 Oil Pressure A2 Oil Pressure Saturated Condensing Temp Saturated Suction Temp
Compressor A1 Compressor A2 Loader A1 Loader A2 Min Load Valve, Valve A
Percent Total Capacity Percent Av ailable Capacity Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure B1 Oil Pressure B2 Oil Pressure Saturated Condensing Temp Saturated Suction Temp
Compressor B1 Compressor B2 Loader B1 Loader B2 Min Load Valve, Valve B
Cooler Entering Fluid Cooler Leaving Fluid Condenser Entering Fluid Condenser Leaving Fluid 4 to 20 mA Reset
Carrier DataLink is an interface device that allows other HV AC control systems to read and change (“read/write”) values in system elements connected to a CCN bus. Both DataP ort and DataLink request data from a specified CCN system element and translate this data into ASCII characters off network. Infor­mation from the 30GX,HX chiller control to support interface are listed in the following tables.
MODE
STATUS
OCC
ENA_CCN
CHIL_S_S
ALM alarm_1 alarm_2 alarm_3 alarm_4 alarm_5
DEM_LIM
CAP_T
CTRL_PNT
EWT
LWT
EMSTOP
HEATCOOL
CAPA_T CAPA_A
DP_A
SP_A OP_A1 OP_A2
TMP_SCTA
TMP_SSTA
K_A1_RLY
K_A2_RLY LOADR_A1 LOADR_A2
MLV_A
CAPB_T CAPB_A
DP_B
SP_B OP_B1 OP_B2
TMP_SCTB TMP_SSTB
K_B1_RLY
K_B2_RLY LOADR_B1 LOADR_B2
MLV_B
COOL_EWT COOL_LWT
COND_EWT
COND_LWT
RST_MA
RO RO RO RW RW RO RO RO RO RO RO RW RO RW RO RO RW RO
RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO RO
RO RO RO RO RO
88
Page 89
CCN T ABLE NAME DESCRI P TI ON POINT ACCE SS
UNIT_3
SETPOINT
LEGEND
RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write
APPENDIX D (cont)
BacLink Object Definition (cont)
Fan Relay 1 Fan Relay 2 Fan Relay 3 Fan Relay 4 Fan Relay 5 Fan Relay 6 4 to 20 mA Demand CCN Loadshed Cooler Pump Relay Condenser Pump Relay
Cool Set Point 1 Cool Set Point 2 Heat Set Point 1 Heat Set Point 2 Demand Switch 1 Set Point Demand Switch 2 Set Point
FAN_1 FAN_2 FAN_3 FAN_4 FAN_5 FAN_6
LMT_MA
DL_ST AT COOL_PMP COND_PMP
CSP1 SCP2 HSP1
HSP2 dlswsp1 dlswsp2
CCN T ABLE NAME DA TA TABL E NA ME ACCESS
OCCDEFCS
OCCPC01S OCCPC02S OCCPC65S
RW RW RW
RO RO RO RO RO RO RW RO RO RO
RW RW RW RW RW RW
89
Page 90
APPENDIX D (cont)
DataPort/DataLink Object Definition
CCN TABLE NAM E DESCRI PT I ON ST ATUS UNITS POINT FORCIB LE
GENERAL PARAMETERS Control Mode Run Status Occupied? CCN Enable CCN Chiller Start/Stop Alarm State
Current Alarm 1 Current Alarm 2 Current Alarm 3
A_UNIT_1
CIRCA_AN
CIRA_DIO
*These values may be modified at any time (Unit On/Off).
Current Alarm 4
Current Alarm 5 Active Demand Limit Percent Total Capacity Water/Brine Set Point Control Point Entering Fl ui d Temp Leaving Fluid T emp Emergency Stop Minutes Left for Start Heat/Cool Status
CIRCUIT A ANALOG V AL UES Total Capacity Available Capacity Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure A1 Oil Pressure Diff. A2 Oil Pressure Diff. A1 Oil Pressure A2 Oil Pressure Discharge Gas T emperature A1 Motor T emperature A2 Motor T emperature Saturated Condensing Temp Saturated Suction Temp EXV Percent Open Motormaster Speed* Water Valv e Position* Cooler Level Indicator CPM A1 Feedback CPM A2 Feedback Circuit A ECON Pressure
CIR. A DISCRETE OUTPUTS Compressor A1 Compressor A2 Loader A1 Loader A2 Min. Load Valve, Valve A Circuit A Oil Heater A1 Mtr Cooling Solenoid A2 Mtr Cooling Solenoid Circuit A Oil Pump Oil Solenoid A1 Oil Solenoid A2 CIR A DISCRETE INPUTS Compressor A1 Feedback Compressor A2 Feedback
(Modes 5-12)
On/Off/T est
Yes/No
On/Off
Start/Stop
Normal
nn.n nn.n nn.n nn.n
nn.n 0-100 0-100
snn.n
snn.n snnn.n snnn.n
Enable/Emstop
0-15
Heat/Cool
0-100 0-100
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
nnn.n
snnn.n snnn.n
0-100 0-100 0-100
0-3 0-10 0-10
nnn.n
On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off
On/Off On/Off
% % °F °F °F °F
min
%
% PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI
°F
°F
°F
°F
°F
%
%
%
—
Volts Volts
PSI
MODE
ST ATUS
OCC ENA_CCN CHIL_S_S
ALM
alarm1 alarm2 alarm3 alarm4 alarm5
DEM_LIM
CAP_T
SP
CTRL_PNT
EWT
LWT
EMSTOP
min_left
HEATCOOL
CAPA_T
CAPA_A
DP_A
SP_A DOP_A1 DOP_A2
OP_A1 OP_A2
DISTMP_A
TMTR_A1 TMTR_A2
TMP_SCTA
TMP_SSTA
EXV_A
SPEEDA
WV_A
LEVEL_A K_A1_FBK K_A2_FBK
ECNP_A
K_A1_RLY
K_A2_RLY LOADR_A1 LOADR_A2
ML V_A
OILA_HTR MTRCL_A1 MTRCL_A2
OILPMP_A
OILSL_A1 OILSL_A2
K_A1_FBK K_A2_FBK
N N N Y Y N N N N N N Y N N Y N N Y N N
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N
N N N N N N N N N N N
N N
90
Page 91
APPENDIX D (cont)
DataPort/DataLink Object Definition (cont)
CCN T ABLE NAME DESCRIPTI ON ST ATUS UNITS POINT FORCIBL E
CIRCUIT A ANALOG VALUES Total Capacity Available Capacity Discharge Pressure Suction Pressure B1 Oil Pressure Diff. B2 Oil Pressure Diff. B1 Oil Pressure B2 Oil Pressure
CIRCB_AN
CIRB_DIO
UNIT_2
*These values may be modified at any time (Unit On/Off).
Discharge Gas T emperature B1 Motor T emperature B2 Motor T emperature Saturated Condensing Temp Saturated Suction Temp EXV Percent Open Motormaster Speed* Cooler Level Indicator CPM B1 Feedback CPM B2 Feedback Circuit B ECON Pressure
CIR. B DISCRETE OUTPUTS Compressor B1 Compressor B2 Loader B1 Loader B2 Min. Load Valve, Valve B Circuit B Oil Heater B1 Mtr Cooling Solenoid B2 Mtr Cooling Solenoid Circuit B Oil Pump Oil Solenoid B1 Oil Solenoid B2 CIR B DISCRETE INPUTS Compressor B1 Feedback Compressor B2 Feedback
UNIT ANALOG PARAMETERS Cooler Entering Fluid Cooler Leaving Fluid Condenser Entering Fluid Condenser Leaving Fluid Reclaim Entering Flui d Reclaim Leaving Fluid 5 Volt Supply TEMPERATURE RESET 4 to 20 mA Reset Signal Return Reset Signal External Reset Signal Outdoor Air Temp Calculated Reset
0-100 0-100 nnn.n nnn.n nnn.n nnn.n nnn.n nnn.n
snnn.n snnn.n
0-100 0-100
0-3 0-10 0-10
nnn.n
On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off
On/Off On/Off
snnn.n snnn.n snnn.n snnn.n snnn.n snnn.n
sn.n nn.n
snnn.n snnn.n snnn.n snnn.n
%
% PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI PSI
°F
°F
°F
°F
°F
%
%
—
Volts Volts
PSI
°F
°F
°F
°F
°F
°F
Volts
mA
^F
°F
°F
^F
CAPB_T CAPB_A
DP_B
SP_B DOP_B1 DOP_B2
OP_B1 OP_B2
DISTMP_B
TMTR_B1
TMTR_B2 TMP_SCTB TMP_SSTB
EXV_B SPEEDB LEVEL_B
K_B1_FBK K_B2_FBK
ECNP_B
K_B1_RLY
K_B2_RLY LOADR_B1 LOADR_B2
ML V_B
OILB_HTR MTRCL_B1 MTRCL_B2 OILPMP_B
OILSL_B1 OILSL_B2
K_B1_FBK
K_B2_FBK
COOL_EWT
COOL_LWT
COND_EWT
COND_LWT
HR_EWT HR_LWT
P_REF
RST_MA
RSTRTN
T_SPACE
OA T
sp_delta
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N
N N N N N N N N N N N
N N
N N N N N N N
N N Y Y N
91
Page 92
APPENDIX D (cont)
DataPort/DataLink Object Definition (cont)
CCN T ABLE NAME DESCRI P TI ON STATUS UNITS POINT FORCIBLE
MISC INPUTS/OUTPUTS Fan Relay 1 Fan Relay 2 Fan Relay 3 Fan Relay 4 Fan Relay 5 Fan Relay 6 DEMAND LIMIT 4 to 20 mA Demand Signal Demand Switch 1 Demand Switch 2 CCN Loadshed Signal
UNIT_3
CCN TABLE NAME DESCRI PT I ON S TATUS DEF A U LTS UNITS POINT
SETPOINT
*These values may be modified at any time (Unit On/Off).
Max Allowable CAP PUMPS Cooler Pump Relay Cooler Pump Flow Switch Condenser Pump Relay Condenser Pump Flow Switch MISCELLANEOUS Ice Valve Ice Build Complete Heat/Cool Switch Dual Set Point Switch Cooler Heater Options T emperature 1 Options T emperature 2
COOLING Cool Set Point 1* Cool Set Point 2* Cooling Ramp Loading* HEATING Heat Set Point 1* Heat Set Point 2* Heating Ramp Loading* HEAD PRESSURE Head Pressure Set Point A* Head Pressure Set Point B* DEMAND LIMIT Demand Switch 1 Set Point* Demand Switch 2 Set Point* LCW Delta Alarm Limit* Minute off time* Motor T emp Set Point*
On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off
nn.n On/Off On/Off
Normal/Redline/Shed
0-100
On/Off On/Off On/Off On/Off
On/Off Yes/ No
Heat/Cool
On/Off On/Off snnn.n snnn.n
snnn.n snnn.n
0.2 to 2.0 snnn.n
snnn.n
0.2 to 2.0
nnn.n nnn.n
0-100 0-100
2.0 to 60 0 to 15
0.0 to 240.0
mA
%
°F °F
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
185.0
44.0
44.0
1.0
1.0
0 0
60.0 0
FAN_1 FAN_2 FAN_3 FAN_4 FAN_5 FAN_6
LMT_MA DMD_SW1 DMD_SW2
DL_STAT
DEM_LIM
COOL_PMP CFLOW_SW COND_PMP DFLOW_SW
ICE_VALVE
ICE_DONE
HC_SW
DUAL
COOL_HTR
OPT_TMP1 OPT_TMP2
°F °F
^F
°F °F
^F
°F °F
% %
^F
min
°F
N N N N N N
N N N N
Y
N N N N
N N
Y
Y N N N
CSP1 CSP2
CRAMP
HSP1 HSP2
HRAMP
HSP_A HSP_B
dlswsp1 dlswsp2
lcw_lmt
delay
mtr_t_sp
92
Page 93
100
APPENDIX E
The following charts list pressure drops for coolers and condensers.
10
PRESSURE DROP (FT WG)
1
100
Unit Size Range
OTE: Ft of water = 2.31 x psig.
136, 146
076, 086
096
COOLER FLOW RATE (GPM)
106
116, 126
30HX COOLER PRESSURE DROP — ENGLISH
161, 171 186
206 246-271
1000
1000
100
PRESSURE DROP (KPA)
10
Unit Size Range
116, 126
076, 086
1
1
COOLER FLOW RATE (L/S)
10
106
096
136, 146
161, 171
186
206 246-271
100
30HX COOLER PRESSURE DROP — SI
93
Page 94
APPENDIX E (cont)
Unit Size Range
NOTE: Ft of water = 2.31 x psig.
30HX CONDENSER PRESSURE DROP — ENGLISH
Unit Size Range
30HX CONDENSER PRESSURE DROP — SI
94
Page 95
APPENDIX E (cont)
1000
100
10
1
10
100
COOLER FLOW RATE (L/s)
PRESSURE DROP (kpa)
30GX205, 206
30GX225, 226
30GX250, 251, 265
NOTE: Ft of water = 2.31 x psig.
30GX080-176 COOLER PRESSURE DROP —
ENGLISH
100
10
30GX205, 206
30GX225, 226
PRESSURE DROP (ft wg)
1
100
COOLER FLOW RATE (GPM)
30GX250, 251, 265
30GX205-265 COOLER PRESSURE DROP —
ENGLISH
30GX080-176 COOLER PRESSURE DROP —
SI
30GX205-265 COOLER PRESSURE DROP —
SI
1000
95
Page 96
100
10
PRESSURE DROP (ft wg)
APPENDIX E (cont)
1
100
COOLER FLOW RATE (GPM)
30GX281-350 COOLER PRESSURE DROP — ENGLISH
NOTE: Ft of water = 2.31 x psig.
1000
100
10
PRESSURE DROP (kpa)
1
10
COOLER FLOW RATE (L/s)
10000
100
30GX281-350 COOLER PRESSURE DROP — SI
96
Page 97
LEGEND
APPENDIX F
Electronic Expansion Valve
High Pressure Switch
EXV —
HPS —
Typical System Components, 30GX, With Economizer
97
Page 98
LEGEND
APPENDIX F (cont)
Electronic Expansion Valve
High Pressure Switch
EXV —
HPS —
Typical System Components, 30HX, Without Economizer
98
Page 99
09DK Condensing Units, 11 Accessing Functions and Subfunctions, 15 Actual Start-Up, 69 Adjusting PID Routines, 14 Alarms and Alerts, 45 Air-Cooled Units (30GX), 10 Automatic Default Display, 15 Back Pressure V alve, 4 Burnout Clean-Up Procedure, 60 Capacity Control Overrides, 9 Capacity Control, 7 Capacity Sequence Determination, 8 Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) Interface, 66 Checking Display Codes, 45 Close Control, 7 Coil Cleaning, 55 Complete Unit Stoppage, 45 Compressor Alarm/Alert Circuit, 46 Compressor Changeout Sequence, 58 Compressor Protection Module (CPM), 3, 4, 65 Compressor Protection, 64 Condenser Coils (30GX Only), 55 Condenser Fans (30GX Only), 56 Condenser Pump Control, 15 Condenserless Units (30HXA), 11 Control (LOR) Switch, 3 Control Module Battery Replacement, 66 Control Modules, 65 Cooler and Condenser (30HXC) Pump Control, 14 Cooler Heater Control, 15 Cooler Protection, 64 Cooler Pump Control, 14 Demand Limit, 41 Demand Limit (CCN Loadshed Controlled), 44 Demand Limit (Switch Controlled, 30GX only), 41 DSIO-HV Relay Module, 3, 65 Economizer Operation, 4 Electronic Expansion Device (EXD), 3 Electronic Expansion Device Module, 3 EXD Troubleshooting Procedure, 52 External Temperature Reset, 41 Externally Powered Demand Limit, 44 Externally Powered Reset, 41 EXV Driver Module (DSIO-EXV), 65 EXV Operati on , 3 Field Wiring, 70 Filter Drier, 60 Head Pressure Control, 10 High Voltage Relay Module (DSIO-HV), 65, 68 History Function, 27 Inspecting/Cleaning Heat Exchangers, 55 Inspecting/Opening Economizers, 53 Inspecting/Opening Electronic Expansion Valves, 53 Keypad and Display Module (HSIO-II), 3, 15 Lead/Lag Determination, 7
INDEX
Liquid Line Service Valve, 60 Loading Sequence, 7 Major System Components, 3 Minimum Load Valve, 8 Minutes Left for Start, 7 Minutes Off Time, 7 Moisture-Liquid Indicator, 60 Motor Cooling, 4 Oil Charging/Low Oil Recharging, 57 Oil Filter Maintenance, 58 Oil Heater Control, 15 Oil Pumps, 4 Oil Separator Heaters (30GX), 64 Operating Sequence, 69 Operation Data, 3 Power Failure External to the Unit, 45 Pre-Start-Up Procedure, 69 Pressure Relief V alves, 64 Pressure Transducer Calibration, 61 Pressure Transducers, 61 Processor Module (PSIO-1), 3, 65, 68 PSIO-2 (8052) Module, 3, 65 Refrigerant Charging/Adding Charge, 56 Relief Devices, 64 Replacing Defective Processor Module, 68 Replacing the External Oil Filter, 58 Replacing the Internal Oil Filter, 58 Restart Procedure, 45 Retubing, 54 Return Fluid T emperature Reset, 41 Safety Considerations, 1 Safety Devices, 64 Schedule Function, 39 Sensors, 4 Service Function, 32 Service, 54 Servicing Coolers and Condensers, 54 Set Point Function, 27 Single Circuit Stoppage, 45 Start-Up and Operation, 69 Start-Up Checklist, CL-1 Status Function, 19 System Check, 69 T emperature Reset, 41 T est Function, 27 Thermistor Replacement, 61 Thermistors, 61 Tightening Cooler/Condenser Head Bolts, 54 Troubleshooting, 45 Tube Plugging, 54 Unit Shutoff, 45 W ater-Cooled Units (30HXC), 1 1 W ater T reatment, 55 Winter Shutdown P r eparation, 68 Wye-Delta vs. Across-the-Line (XL) Starting Option, 7
99
Page 100
Copyright 1999 Carrier Corporation
Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.
Book 2 Tab 5c
PC 903 Catalog No. 533-095 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30G,H-5T Pg 100 8-99 Replaces: 30G,H-4T
Loading...